ZHEJIANG DAHUA VISION TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD. V2.3.2
AI Digital Video Recorder
User's Manual
Foreword
General
This user’s manual (hereinafter referred to be "the Manual") introduces the installation, functions
and operations of the Digital Video Recorder (DVR) (hereinafter referred to be "the Device"). Read
carefully before using the Device, and keep the manual safe for future reference.
Safety Instructions
The following signal words might appear in the manual.
Signal Words Meaning
Indicates a high potential hazard which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
Indicates a medium or low potential hazard which, if not avoided,
could result in slight or moderate injury.
Indicates a potential risk which, if not avoided, could result in property
damage, data loss, reductions in performance, or unpredictable results.
Provides methods to help you solve a problem or save you time.
Provides additional information as a supplement to the text.
Revision History
Version Revision Content Release Time
V2.3.2
●
Added illuminator supported image settings.
●
Updated disarming.
●
Updated encode enhancement.
●
Updated Email settings.
●
Updated web main menu.
July 2023
V2.3.1 Updated 3G/4G/Wi-Fi connection settings. February 2023
V2.3.0
Added DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I3, DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3,
DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3-LP, DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I3, DH-
XVR71xxHE-4K-I3, DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I3, DH-
XVR72xxAN-4K-I3, DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I3, and DH-
XVR78xxS-4K-I3.
July 2022
V2.2.0
Added the conguration of extended smart
illumination.
June 2022
V2.1.0 Added DH-XVR54xxL-I3 and DH-XVR58xxS-I3. May 2022
V2.0.0
●
Added DH-XVR42xxAN-I(V2.0). April 2022
User's Manual
I
Version Revision Content Release Time
●
Added smart illumination as alarm linkage.
●
Added schedule mode for AI functions.
●
Added IVS mode switch.
●
Added disabling event notications in disarming.
●
Added sensitivity for IVS settings.
●
Updated disk quota.
●
Supports safety baseline 2.0.
V1.2.1
●
Updated AI mode switch.
●
Added intelligent diagnosis.
●
Updated alarm-in port settings.
●
Updated password resetting.
December 2021
V1.2.0 Added some models. October 2021
V1.1.0 Added DH-XVR4232AN-I. July 2021
V1.0.11
Added DH-XVR5816S-4KL-I2-LP and DH-
XVR7816S-4KL-X-LP-V2.
May 2021
V1.0.10 Deleted the video quality analytics function. April 2021
V1.0.9 Added some models. February 2021
V1.0.8 Added some models. November 2020
V1.0.7 Added some models. September 2020
V1.0.6 Added some models. May 2020
V1.0.5 Updated to 4.0 UI version. February 2020
V1.0.4
●
Added disarm function, HDD database function,
and SMD preview function.
●
Optimizes Smart Search function, available to
ltering human and vehicle.
September 2019
V1.0.0 First release. October 2018
Privacy Protection Notice
As the device user or data controller, you might collect the personal data of others such as their
face, ngerprints, and license plate number. You need to be in compliance with your local privacy
protection laws and regulations to protect the legitimate rights and interests of other people by
implementing measures which include but are not limited: Providing clear and visible identication
to inform people of the existence of the surveillance area and provide required contact information.
About the Manual
●
The manual is for reference only. Slight dierences might be found between the manual and the
product.
●
We are not liable for losses incurred due to operating the product in ways that are not in
compliance with the manual.
●
The manual will be updated according to the latest laws and regulations of related jurisdictions.
For detailed information, see the paper user’s manual, use our CD-ROM, scan the QR code or
User's Manual
II
visit our ocial website. The manual is for reference only. Slight dierences might be found
between the electronic version and the paper version.
●
All designs and software are subject to change without prior written notice. Product updates
might result in some dierences appearing between the actual product and the manual. Please
contact customer service for the latest program and supplementary documentation.
●
There might be errors in the print or deviations in the description of the functions, operations
and technical data. If there is any doubt or dispute, we reserve the right of nal explanation.
●
Upgrade the reader software or try other mainstream reader software if the manual (in PDF
format) cannot be opened.
●
All trademarks, registered trademarks and company names in the manual are properties of their
respective owners.
●
Please visit our website, contact the supplier or customer service if any problems occur while
using the device.
●
If there is any uncertainty or controversy, we reserve the right of nal explanation.
User's Manual
III
Important Safeguards and Warnings
This section introduces content covering the proper handling of the Device, hazard prevention, and
prevention of property damage. Read carefully before using the Device, and comply with the
guidelines when using it.
Transportation Requirements
Transport the Device under allowed humidity and temperature conditions.
Storage Requirements
Store the Device under allowed humidity and temperature conditions.
Operation Requirements
●
Do not place the Device in a place exposed to sunlight or near heat sources.
●
Keep the Device away from dampness, dust, and soot.
●
Install the Device on a stable surface to prevent it from falling.
●
Do not drop or splash liquid onto the Device, and make sure that there is no object lled with
liquid on the Device to prevent liquid from owing into it.
●
Put the Device in a well-ventilated place, and do not block its ventilation.
●
Operate the Device within the rated range of power input and output.
●
Do not disassemble the Device.
●
Use the Device under allowed humidity and temperature conditions.
Installation Requirements
●
Do not connect the power adapter to the device while the adapter is powered on.
●
Strictly comply with the local electric safety code and standards. Make sure the ambient voltage
is stable and meets the power supply requirements of the device.
●
Do not expose the battery to environments with extremely low air pressure, or extremely high
or low temperatures. Also, it is strictly prohibited to throw the battery into a re or furnace, and
to cut or put mechanical pressure on the battery. This is to avoid the risk of re and explosion.
●
Use the standard power adapter or cabinet power supply. We will assume no responsibility for
any injuries or damages caused by the use of a nonstandard power adapter.
User's Manual
IV
●
Do not place the Device in a place exposed to sunlight or near heat sources.
●
Keep the Device away from dampness, dust, and soot.
●
Put the Device in a well-ventilated place, and do not block its ventilation.
●
Install the Device on a stable surface to prevent it from falling.
●
The power supply must conform to the requirements of ES1 in IEC 62368-1 standard and be no
higher than PS2. Please note that the power supply requirements are subject to the device label.
●
The device is a class I electrical appliance. Make sure that the power supply of the Device is
connected to a power socket with protective earthing.
●
Use power cords that conform to your local requirements, and are rated specications.
●
Before connecting the power supply, make sure the input voltage matches the power
requirements of the Device.
●
When installing the Device, make sure that the power plug and appliance coupler can be easily
reached to cut o power.
●
Install the Device near a power socket for emergency disconnect.
●
It is prohibited for non-professionals and unauthorized personnel to open the Device casing.
User's Manual
V
Table of Contents
Foreword........................................................................................................................................................................................................ I
Important Safeguards and Warnings.................................................................................................................................................IV
1 Introduction..............................................................................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................................................................1
1.2 Functions....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
2 Getting Started........................................................................................................................................................................................ 4
2.1 Checking the Components..................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Installing HDD..............................................................................................................................................................................4
2.2.1 DH-XVR42xxAN-I/DH-XVR42xxAN-I(V2.0)/DH-XVR52xxA-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-I3/DH-
XVR52xxA-4KL-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-I3/DH-XVR52xxAN-I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-I3/DH-
XVR52xxAN-4KL-I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-4KL-I3/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I2/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I3/DH-
XVR72xxA-4KL-I/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I2/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I3/DH-XVR82xxA-4K-I/DH-
XVR82xxA-4KL-I.....................................................................................................................................................................4
2.2.2 DH-XVR58xxS-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2-LP/DH-XVR58xxS-I3/DH-
XVR58xxS-4KL-I3/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3-LP/DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I2/DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I3/DH-
XVR78xxS-4KL-X-LP-V2/DH-XVR88xxS-4KL-I..............................................................................................................6
2.2.3 DH-XVR54xxL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-I3/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I3/DH-
XVR74xxL-4K-I2/DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I3............................................................................................................................ 9
2.2.4 DH-XVR1Bxx-I/DH-XVR1BxxH-I/DH-XVR41xxC-I/DH-XVR41xxHS-I/DH-XVR51xxH-I/DH-
XVR51xxH-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-I3/DH-XVR51xxH-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-4KL-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-
I2/DH-XVR51xxHE-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-I3/DH-XVR51xxHS-I2/DH-
XVR51xxHS-I3/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-I3/DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I2/DH-
XVR71xxH-4K-I3/DH-XVR71xxHE-4KL-I/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-I2/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-I3............................. 11
2.2.5 DH-XVR51xxC-I3/DH-XVR51xxC-4KL-I3...............................................................................................................14
3 The Grand Tour..................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
3.1 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................................................18
3.1.1 DH-XVR51xxH-I.............................................................................................................................................................18
3.1.2 DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I2/DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I3/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-I2/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-I3/DH-
XVR71xxHE-4KL-I................................................................................................................................................................18
3.1.3 DH-XVR72xxA-4KL-I/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I2/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I2/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I3/DH-
XVR72xxA-4K-I3..................................................................................................................................................................19
3.1.4 DH-XVR82xxA-4K-I/DH-XVR82xxA-4KL-I.............................................................................................................19
3.1.5 DH-XVR41xxC-I/DH-XVR41xxHS-I/DH-XVR42xxAN-I/DH-XVR42xxAN-I(V2.0)/DH-XVR51xxH-
I2/DH-XVR51xxH-I3/DH-XVR51xxH-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-4KL-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-I2/DH-
XVR51xxHE-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-I3/DH-XVR51xxHS-I2/DH-
XVR51xxHS-I3/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-I3/DH-XVR52xxA-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-
I3/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-I3/DH-XVR52xxAN-I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-I3/DH-
XVR52xxAN-4KL-I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-4KL-I3............................................................................................................. 20
3.1.6 DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I2/DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I3/DH-XVR78xxS-4KL-X-LP-V2/DH-XVR88xxS-4KL-I........... 21
3.1.7 DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I2/DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I3............................................................................................................21
3.1.8 DH-XVR54xxL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-I3/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I.....................................22
User's Manual
VI
3.1.9 DH-XVR58xxS-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-I3/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3/DH-
XVR58xxS-4KL-I2-LP/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3-LP........................................................................................................ 22
3.1.10 DH-XVR1Bxx-I/DH-XVR1BxxH-I.............................................................................................................................23
3.1.11 DH-XVR51xxC-I3/DH-XVR51xxC-4KL-I3.............................................................................................................23
3.2 Rear Panel....................................................................................................................................................................................24
3.2.1 DH-XVR51xxH-I/DH-XVR51xxH-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-I3/DH-XVR51xxH-4KL-I2/DH-
XVR51xxH-4KL-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-I2/DH-XVR51xxHE-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-I2/DH-
XVR51xxHE-4KL-I3/DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I2/DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I3/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-I2/DH-
XVR71xxHE-4K-I3/DH-XVR71xxHE-4KL-I................................................................................................................... 24
3.2.2 DH-XVR41xxC-I/DH-XVR41xxHS-I/DH-XVR51xxHS-I2/DH-XVR51xxHS-I3/DH-
XVR51xxHS-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-I3...............................................................................................................26
3.2.3 DH-XVR52xxA-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-I3/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-I3/
DHXVR42xxAN-I/DH-XVR42xxAN-I(V2.0)/DH-XVR52xxAN-I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-I3/DH-
XVR52xxAN-4KL-I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-4KL-I3/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I2/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I3/DH-
XVR72xxA-4KL-I/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I2/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I3.........................................................................27
3.2.4 DH-XVR82xxA-4K-I/DH-XVR82xxA-4KL-I.............................................................................................................28
3.2.5 DH-XVR58xxS-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-I3/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3/DH-
XVR78xxS-4K-I2/DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I3/DH-XVR88xxS-4KL-I.................................................................................30
3.2.6 DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2-LP/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3-LP/DH-XVR78xxS-4KL-X-LP-V2...................................32
3.2.7 DH-XVR54xxL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-I3/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I3/DH-
XVR74xxL-4K-I2/DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I3..........................................................................................................................34
3.2.8 DH-XVR1Bxx-I/DH-XVR1BxxH-I...............................................................................................................................36
3.2.9 DH-XVR51xxC-I3/DH-XVR51xxC-4KL-I3...............................................................................................................37
3.3 Remote Control Operations................................................................................................................................................. 37
3.4 Mouse Operations....................................................................................................................................................................39
4 Connection............................................................................................................................................................................................. 41
4.1 Typical Connection Diagram................................................................................................................................................41
4.2 Connecting to Video and Audio Input and Output.....................................................................................................41
4.2.1 Video Input.....................................................................................................................................................................41
4.2.2 Video Output.................................................................................................................................................................42
4.2.3 Audio Input....................................................................................................................................................................42
4.2.4 Audio Output................................................................................................................................................................ 42
4.3 Connecting to Alarm Input and Output...........................................................................................................................43
4.3.1 Introducing Alarm Port..............................................................................................................................................43
4.3.2 Alarm Input.................................................................................................................................................................... 44
4.3.3 Alarm Output................................................................................................................................................................ 44
4.3.4 Alarm Output Relay Parameters.............................................................................................................................45
5 Local Congurations........................................................................................................................................................................... 46
5.1 Initial Settings............................................................................................................................................................................46
5.1.1 Booting Up..................................................................................................................................................................... 46
5.1.2 Initializing the Device.................................................................................................................................................46
5.1.3 Resetting Password.....................................................................................................................................................50
User's Manual
VII
5.1.4 Setting Up with the Startup Wizard......................................................................................................................58
5.2 Live View......................................................................................................................................................................................75
5.2.1 Live View Screen.......................................................................................................................................................... 76
5.2.2 Live View Control bar................................................................................................................................................. 76
5.2.3 Navigation Bar.............................................................................................................................................................. 80
5.2.4 Shortcut Menu..............................................................................................................................................................81
5.2.5 AI Preview Mode.......................................................................................................................................................... 83
5.2.6 Channel Sequence...................................................................................................................................................... 85
5.2.7 Color Setting..................................................................................................................................................................87
5.2.8 Live View Display......................................................................................................................................................... 90
5.2.9 Conguring Tour Settings........................................................................................................................................ 93
5.2.10 Quick Operation Bar.................................................................................................................................................96
5.3 Entering Main Menu................................................................................................................................................................98
5.4 Controlling PTZ Cameras.................................................................................................................................................... 100
5.4.1 Conguring PTZ Connection Settings...............................................................................................................101
5.4.2 Working with PTZ Control Panel......................................................................................................................... 102
5.4.3 Conguring PTZ Functions....................................................................................................................................104
5.4.4 Calling PTZ Functions.............................................................................................................................................. 107
5.4.5 Calling OSD Menu.....................................................................................................................................................109
5.5 Conguring Camera Settings............................................................................................................................................ 110
5.5.1 Conguring Image Settings.................................................................................................................................. 110
5.5.2 Conguring Encode Settings................................................................................................................................116
5.5.3 Conguring Snapshot Settings............................................................................................................................118
5.5.4 Conguring Encode Enhancement.................................................................................................................... 119
5.5.5 Conguring Overlay Settings................................................................................................................................121
5.5.6 Conguring Covered Area Settings....................................................................................................................122
5.5.7 Conguring Channel Type.....................................................................................................................................123
5.5.8 Upgrading Coaxial Camera....................................................................................................................................124
5.6 Conguring Remote Devices.............................................................................................................................................125
5.6.1 Adding Remote Devices......................................................................................................................................... 125
5.6.2 Managing Remote Devices....................................................................................................................................142
5.7 Conguring Record Settings............................................................................................................................................. 145
5.7.1 Enabling Record Control........................................................................................................................................ 145
5.7.2 Conguring Recorded Video Storage Schedule............................................................................................ 146
5.8 Conguring Snapshot Settings.........................................................................................................................................146
5.8.1 Conguring Snapshot Trigger..............................................................................................................................146
5.8.2 Conguring Snapshot Storage Schedule......................................................................................................... 149
5.8.3 Backing up Snapshots to FTP................................................................................................................................149
5.9 Playing Back Video................................................................................................................................................................ 150
5.9.1 Enabling Record Control........................................................................................................................................ 150
User's Manual
VIII
5.9.2 Instant Playback.........................................................................................................................................................151
5.9.3 Video Playback........................................................................................................................................................... 151
5.9.4 Smart Search...............................................................................................................................................................157
5.9.5 Showing AI Rule during Playback....................................................................................................................... 157
5.9.6 Marking and Playing Back Video......................................................................................................................... 158
5.9.7 Playing Back Snapshots.......................................................................................................................................... 161
5.9.8 Playing Back Splices................................................................................................................................................. 161
5.9.9 Using the File List...................................................................................................................................................... 162
5.10 Alarm Events Settings........................................................................................................................................................165
5.10.1 Alarm Information.................................................................................................................................................. 165
5.10.2 Alarm Input Settings..............................................................................................................................................166
5.10.3 Alarm Output Settings..........................................................................................................................................172
5.10.4 Video Detection.......................................................................................................................................................177
5.10.5 System Events.......................................................................................................................................................... 183
5.10.6 Conguring Disarming......................................................................................................................................... 186
5.11 AI Function.............................................................................................................................................................................188
5.11.1 Conguring AI Mode............................................................................................................................................. 188
5.11.2 For Pro AI Series.......................................................................................................................................................189
5.11.3 For Lite AI Series......................................................................................................................................................232
5.11.4 Conguring IVS Mode...........................................................................................................................................239
5.11.5 Conguring Smart Schedule.............................................................................................................................. 240
5.12 IoT Function...........................................................................................................................................................................241
5.12.1 Conguring Sensor Settings...............................................................................................................................241
5.12.2 Conguring Temperature and Humidity Camera.......................................................................................250
5.12.3 Conguring Wireless Siren.................................................................................................................................. 262
5.13 POS........................................................................................................................................................................................... 262
5.13.1 Searching the Transaction Records..................................................................................................................263
5.13.2 Conguring POS Settings.................................................................................................................................... 264
5.14 Conguring Backup Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 265
5.14.1 Finding USB Device................................................................................................................................................265
5.14.2 Backing up Files.......................................................................................................................................................266
5.15 Network Management...................................................................................................................................................... 268
5.15.1 Conguring Network Settings........................................................................................................................... 268
5.15.2 Conguring Network Testing Settings........................................................................................................... 286
5.16 Conguring Account Settings........................................................................................................................................ 289
5.16.1 Conguring User Account...................................................................................................................................290
5.16.2 Conguring Group Account............................................................................................................................... 295
5.16.3 Conguring ONVIF Users..................................................................................................................................... 298
5.17 Audio Management........................................................................................................................................................... 299
5.17.1 Conguring Audio Files........................................................................................................................................300
User's Manual
IX
5.17.2 Conguring Playing Schedule for Audio Files..............................................................................................301
5.18 Storage Management........................................................................................................................................................302
5.18.1 Conguring Basic Settings.................................................................................................................................. 302
5.18.2 Conguring the Recording and Snapshot Schedule................................................................................. 303
5.18.3 Conguring Disk Manager.................................................................................................................................. 304
5.18.4 Conguring Record................................................................................................................................................305
5.18.5 Conguring Advance Settings...........................................................................................................................305
5.18.6 Conguring Disk Quota........................................................................................................................................308
5.18.7 Conguring HDD Detecting Settings..............................................................................................................311
5.18.8 Conguring Record Estimate............................................................................................................................. 313
5.18.9 Conguring FTP Storage Settings.................................................................................................................... 315
5.19 Security Center.....................................................................................................................................................................317
5.19.1 Security Status......................................................................................................................................................... 317
5.19.2 System Service.........................................................................................................................................................318
5.19.3 Attack Defense.........................................................................................................................................................322
5.19.4 CA Certicate............................................................................................................................................................325
5.19.5 Audio/Video Encryption.......................................................................................................................................328
5.19.6 Security Warning.....................................................................................................................................................330
5.20 Conguring System Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 333
5.20.1 Conguring General System Settings............................................................................................................. 333
5.20.2 Conguring RS-232 Settings...............................................................................................................................334
5.20.3 Conguring System Maintenance Settings...................................................................................................335
5.20.4 Exporting and Importing System Settings.................................................................................................... 336
5.20.5 Restoring Default Settings...................................................................................................................................338
5.20.6 Updating the Device..............................................................................................................................................339
5.20.7 Exporting Intelligent Diagnosis Data.............................................................................................................. 342
5.21 Viewing Information.......................................................................................................................................................... 342
5.21.1 Viewing Version Details........................................................................................................................................342
5.21.2 Viewing Log Information..................................................................................................................................... 343
5.21.3 Viewing Event Information................................................................................................................................. 344
5.21.4 Viewing Network Information............................................................................................................................345
5.21.5 Viewing HDD Information................................................................................................................................... 347
5.21.6 Viewing Channel Information............................................................................................................................348
5.21.7 Viewing Data Stream Information....................................................................................................................349
5.22 Logging out of the Device............................................................................................................................................... 350
6 Web Operations..................................................................................................................................................................................351
6.1 Connecting to Network....................................................................................................................................................... 351
6.2 Logging in to the Web Interface...................................................................................................................................... 351
6.3 Introducing Web Main Menu............................................................................................................................................ 352
User's Manual
X
6.4 Viewing Open-source Software Notice..........................................................................................................................354
7 FAQ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................356
Appendix 1 Glossary...........................................................................................................................................................................362
Appendix 2 HDD Capacity Calculation........................................................................................................................................364
Appendix 3 Compatible Backup Devices................................................................................................................................... 365
Appendix 3.1 Compatible USB List................................................................................................................................365
Appendix 3.2 Compatible SD Card List........................................................................................................................366
Appendix 3.3 Compatible Portable HDD List............................................................................................................ 366
Appendix 3.4 Compatible USB DVD List..................................................................................................................... 367
Appendix 3.5 Compatible SATA DVD List...................................................................................................................367
Appendix 3.6 Compatible SATA HDD List.................................................................................................................. 367
Appendix 4 Compatible CD/DVD Burner List............................................................................................................................374
Appendix 5 Compatible Displayer List........................................................................................................................................ 375
Appendix 6 Compatible Switcher................................................................................................................................................. 376
Appendix 7 Earthing.......................................................................................................................................................................... 377
Appendix 7.1 What is the Surge..................................................................................................................................... 377
Appendix 7.2 The Earthing Modes................................................................................................................................ 378
Appendix 7.3 Thunder Proof Ground Method in the Monitor System............................................................ 379
Appendix 7.4 The Shortcut Way to Check the Electric System by Digital Multimeter............................... 380
Appendix 8 RJ45-RS232 Connection Cable Denition.......................................................................................................... 384
Appendix 9 Cybersecurity Recommendations.........................................................................................................................386
User's Manual
XI
1 Introduction
1.1 Overview
The Device is an excellent digital monitor product for security industry. The embedded LINUX OS
assures the stable operation. The H.265 and G.711 technologies assure the high quality image and
low bit stream. The frame-by-frame play function displays more details for analysis, and provides
the functions such as record, playback, and monitor and assures the synchronization for audio and
video. The Device also adopts the advanced control technology and great network data
transmission capability.
The Device adopts embedded design to achieve high security and reliability. It can work in the local
end and, with strong networking capability it can get connected to the professional surveillance
software (Smart PSS) to form a security network to show its powerful remote monitoring function.
The Device is applicable to the areas such as bank, telecom, electricity, trac, intelligent residential
district, factory, warehouse, resources, and water conservancy facilities.
1.2 Functions
The functions might be dierent depending on the software and hardware versions of the model
you purchased.
AI Function
●
Support face detection that analyzes the attributes such as age, gender, glasses, beard, mask,
and then make structured of these data to store for quick search.
●
Support face recognition that compares the captured face snapshot with the face database and
link the congured alarms (face detection should be enabled).
●
Support searching by picture that is convenient for nding the target picture from database.
●
Support 16 channel IVS function that includes tripwire and intrusion detection. The IVS function
can avoid wrong alarms by ltering the factors such as rains, light, and animals.
●
Calculate the quantity of detected humans within 24 hours.
●
Detect the vehicles passing by within 24 hours.
Real-time Surveillance
●
Support VGA port and HDMI port to realize the surveillance through monitors.
●
Support HDMI, VGA, and TV output at the same time.
IoT Management
Provide specic management module for IoT features including humidity and temperature data
reports and alarms linkage.
User's Manual
1
Sensor Integration
Integrate coaxial cameras with diverse array of sensors such as temperature, humidity and wireless
alarm devices.
Storage Management
●
Special data format to guarantee data security and avoid the risk of modifying data viciously.
●
Support digital watermark.
Compression Format
Support multiple-channel audio and video signal. An independent hardware decodes the audio
and video signal from each channel to maintain video and audio synchronization.
Backup Function
●
Support backup operation through USB port (such as USB storage disk, portable HDD, and
burner).
●
Client-end user can download the le from local HDD through network to backup.
Record & Playback
●
Support each channel real-time record independently, and simultaneously support the
functions such as search, backward play, network monitor, record search, and download.
●
Support various playback modes: slow play, fast play, backward play and frame by frame play.
●
Support time title overlay so that you can view event accurate occurred time.
●
Support zooming in the selected area in the live view.
Network Operation
Support network remote real-time monitor, remote record search and remote PTZ control.
Alarm Activation
●
Several relay alarm outputs to realize alarm activation and on-site light control.
●
The alarm input port and output port have the protection circuit to guarantee the Device safety.
Communication Port
●
RS-485 port can realize alarm input and PTZ control.
●
RS-232 port can connect to keyboard, COM port of PC or the matrix control.
●
Standard Ethernet port can realize network remote access function.
●
The dual-network port has the multi-address, fault tolerance, load balance setup mode.
User's Manual
2
PTZ Control
Support PTZ decoder through RS-485 port.
Intelligent Operation
●
Support mouse operation function.
●
Support "copy and paste" function for the same settings.
UPnP (Universal Plug and Play)
Establish mapping connection between LAN and WAN through UPnP protocol.
Camera Self-adaptive
Auto-recognize and work with the PAL or NTSC camera and HD camera.
User's Manual
3
2 Getting Started
2.1 Checking the Components
The actual appearance, component, or quantity might be dierent depending on the model you
purchased.
When you receive the Device, please check against the following checking list. If any of the items
are missing or damaged, contact the local retailer or after-sales engineer immediately.
Table 2-1 Checking list
No. Checking Items Requirements
1 Package
Appearance No obvious damage.
Packing materials
No broken or distorted positions
that could be caused by hit.
2 Labels Labels on the device
Not torn up.
Do not tear up or throw away the
labels; otherwise the warranty
services are not ensured. You
need to provide the serial
number of the product when you
call the after-sales service.
3 Device
Appearance No obvious damage.
Data cables, power
cables, fan cables,
mainboard
No connection loose.
2.2 Installing HDD
Please check whether the HDD is already installed in the Device when you rst time using the
Device. We recommend you use the HDD recommended ocially. Do not use the PC HDD.
Shut down the device and then unplug the power cable before you open the case to replace the
HDD.
2.2.1 DH-XVR42xxAN-I/DH-XVR42xxAN-I(V2.0)/DH-XVR52xxA-
I2/DH-XVR52xxA-I3/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-
I3/DH-XVR52xxAN-I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-I3/DH-XVR52xxAN-4KL-
I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-4KL-I3/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I2/DH-
User's Manual
4
XVR72xxA-4K-I3/DH-XVR72xxA-4KL-I/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I2/DH-
XVR72xxAN-4K-I3/DH-XVR82xxA-4K-I/DH-XVR82xxA-4KL-I
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws to take o the cover.
Figure 2-1 Remove screws
Step 2 Put two screws on the HDD and twist one turn.
Figure 2-2 Put screws
Step 3 Align the two screws with the holes on the device.
Figure 2-3 Align screws
User's Manual
5
Step 4 Turn the device and put in the other two screws, and then fasten all screws to x the HDD
to the device.
Figure 2-4 Fasten screws
Step 5 Use power cable and data cable to connect the device and HDD.
Figure 2-5 Connect cables
Step 6 Put back the cover and fasten the screws.
Figure 2-6 Put back cover
2.2.2 DH-XVR58xxS-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-
I2-LP/DH-XVR58xxS-I3/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-
User's Manual
6
I3-LP/DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I2/DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I3/DH-
XVR78xxS-4KL-X-LP-V2/DH-XVR88xxS-4KL-I
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws from the chassis.
Figure 2-7 Remove screws
Step 2 Take o the cover of the chassis.
Figure 2-8 Take o cover
Step 3 Remove the screws from the drive bracket to take it o.
Figure 2-9 Take o drive bracket
Step 4 Align the four screw holes on the disk to those on the drive bracket and x the disk on the
bracket.
Figure 2-10 Fix disk
Step 5 Fix other disks on the bracket as needed.
User's Manual
7
Figure 2-11 Fix other disks
Step 6 Fix the two drive brackets.
This is only need on models with 8 bays.
Figure 2-12 Fix drive brackets
Step 7 Put the drive brackets back and x them in the DVR.
Figure 2-13 Put back drive bracket
Step 8 Connect the disks and the DVR with power cable and data cable.
The following gure shows the connection of 4-bay model for example.
User's Manual
8
Figure 2-14 Connect cables
Step 9 Put the cover back and fasten the screws.
Figure 2-15 Put back cover
2.2.3 DH-XVR54xxL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-
I3/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I3/DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I2/DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I3
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the xing screws on the rear panel.
Figure 2-16 Remove screws
Step 2 Remove the cover along the direction shown in the following arrow.
Figure 2-17 Remove cover
Step 3 Remove the screws on the sides of HDD bracket to take out the bracket.
User's Manual
9
Figure 2-18 Remove bracket
Step 4 Match the four screw holes on the HDD with the four holes on the bracket and then
fasten the screws. The HDD is xed to the bracket.
Figure 2-19 Fix HDD
Step 5 Install the other HDDs.
Figure 2-20 Install other HDDs
Step 6 Place the bracket to the device and then fasten the screws on the sides of the bracket.
Figure 2-21 Fasten screws
Step 7 Connect the HDD data cable and power cable to the device.
User's Manual
10
Figure 2-22 Connect cables
Step 8 Put back the cover and fasten the screws on the rear panel to complete the installation.
Figure 2-23 Put back cover
2.2.4 DH-XVR1Bxx-I/DH-XVR1BxxH-I/DH-XVR41xxC-I/DH-
XVR41xxHS-I/DH-XVR51xxH-I/DH-XVR51xxH-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-
I3/DH-XVR51xxH-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-4KL-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-
I2/DH-XVR51xxHE-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-I2/DH-
XVR51xxHE-4KL-I3/DH-XVR51xxHS-I2/DH-XVR51xxHS-I3/DH-
XVR51xxHS-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-I3/DH-XVR71xxH-4K-
I2/DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I3/DH-XVR71xxHE-4KL-I/DH-
XVR71xxHE-4K-I2/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-I3
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws on the cover.
User's Manual
11
Figure 2-24 Remove screws
Step 2 Remove the cover.
Figure 2-25 Remove cover
Step 3 Align the screws of the HDD with the holes on the back of the device and fasten them.
Figure 2-26 Fasten screws
Step 4 Connect the HDD cable and the power cable to the mainboard.
User's Manual
12
Figure 2-27 Connect cables
Step 5 Put back the cover.
Figure 2-28 Put back cover
Step 6 Fasten the screws.
Figure 2-29 Fasten screws
User's Manual
13
2.2.5 DH-XVR51xxC-I3/DH-XVR51xxC-4KL-I3
Procedure
Step 1 Remove the screws.
Figure 2-30 Remove screws
Step 2 Remove the cover.
Figure 2-31 Remove cover
Step 3 Align the screws of the HDD with the holes on the DVR and fasten them.
User's Manual
14
Figure 2-32 Install HDD
Step 4 Use the HDD cable and power cable to connect HDD and mainboard.
User's Manual
15
Figure 2-33 Connect cables
Step 5 Put back the cover.
Figure 2-34 Put back cover
Step 6 Fasten the screws.
User's Manual
16
Figure 2-35 Fasten screws
User's Manual
17
3 The Grand Tour
This chapter introduces various components of the Device, remote control and mouse operations.
3.1 Front Panel
3.1.1 DH-XVR51xxH-I
Figure 3-1 Front panel
Table 3-1 Front panel description
No. Port Name Function
1 HDD Glows blue when HDD status is abnormal.
2 NET Glows blue when network status is abnormal.
3 POWER
Glows blue when the power is connected
properly.
4 USB port
Connects to peripheral devices such as USB
storage device, keyboard, and mouse.
3.1.2 DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I2/DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I3/DH-
XVR71xxHE-4K-I2/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-I3/DH-XVR71xxHE-4KL-I
Figure 3-2 Front panel
User's Manual
18
Table 3-2 Front panel description
No. Port Name Function
1 USB port
Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage
device, keyboard, and mouse.
3.1.3 DH-XVR72xxA-4KL-I/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I2/DH-
XVR72xxA-4K-I2/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I3/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I3
Figure 3-3 Front panel
Table 3-3 Front panel description
No. Port Name Function
1 IR receiver Receives infrared signal from remote control.
2 USB port
Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage
device, keyboard, and mouse.
3.1.4 DH-XVR82xxA-4K-I/DH-XVR82xxA-4KL-I
Figure 3-4 Front panel
Table 3-4 Front panel description
No. Port Name Function
1 USB port
Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage
device, keyboard, and mouse.
2 IR receiver Receives infrared signal from remote control.
User's Manual
19
3.1.5 DH-XVR41xxC-I/DH-XVR41xxHS-I/DH-XVR42xxAN-I/DH-
XVR42xxAN-I(V2.0)/DH-XVR51xxH-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-I3/DH-
XVR51xxH-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-4KL-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-I2/DH-
XVR51xxHE-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-
I3/DH-XVR51xxHS-I2/DH-XVR51xxHS-I3/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-
I2/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-I3/DH-XVR52xxA-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-
I3/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-I3/DH-XVR52xxAN-
I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-I3/DH-XVR52xxAN-4KL-I2/DH-
XVR52xxAN-4KL-I3
Figure 3-5 Front panel
Table 3-5 Front panel description
No. Port Name Function
1 HDD Glows when HDD status is abnormal.
2 NET Glows when network status is abnormal.
3 POWER Glows when the power is connected properly.
4 USB port
Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage
device, keyboard, and mouse.
User's Manual
20
3.1.6 DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I2/DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I3/DH-
XVR78xxS-4KL-X-LP-V2/DH-XVR88xxS-4KL-I
Figure 3-6 Front panel
Table 3-6 Front panel description
No. Port Name Function
1 IR receiver Receives infrared signal from remote control.
2 USB port
Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage
device, keyboard, and mouse.
3.1.7 DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I2/DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I3
Figure 3-7 Front panel
Table 3-7 Front panel description
No. Port Name Function
1 IR receiver Receives infrared signal from remote control.
2 USB port
Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage
device, keyboard, and mouse.
User's Manual
21
3.1.8 DH-XVR54xxL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-
I3/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I
Figure 3-8 Front panel
Table 3-8 Front panel description
No. Port Name Function
1 USB port
Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage
device, keyboard, and mouse.
3.1.9 DH-XVR58xxS-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-I3/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-
I2/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2-LP/DH-
XVR58xxS-4KL-I3-LP
Figure 3-9 Front panel
Table 3-9 Front panel description
No. Port Name Function
1 USB port
Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage
device, keyboard, and mouse.
User's Manual
22
3.1.10 DH-XVR1Bxx-I/DH-XVR1BxxH-I
Figure 3-10 Front panel
3.1.11 DH-XVR51xxC-I3/DH-XVR51xxC-4KL-I3
Figure 3-11 Front panel
User's Manual
23
Table 3-10 Front panel description
Icon Name Function
HDD status indicator
●
The indicator is o when the HDD is running
normally.
●
The indicator glows blue when the HDD is in
malfunction.
Power status indicator
●
The indicator is o when the power is connected
abnormally.
●
The indicator glows blue when the power is
connected normally.
Network status indicator
●
The indicator is o when the network connection is
correct.
●
The indicator glows blue when the network
connection is abnormal.
3.2 Rear Panel
3.2.1 DH-XVR51xxH-I/DH-XVR51xxH-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-I3/DH-
XVR51xxH-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxH-4KL-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-I2/DH-
XVR51xxHE-I3/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHE-4KL-
I3/DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I2/DH-XVR71xxH-4K-I3/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-
I2/DH-XVR71xxHE-4K-I3/DH-XVR71xxHE-4KL-I
Figure 3-12 Rear panel
Table 3-11 Rear panel description
No. Port Name Function
1 Alarm input port 1–16
Four groups of alarm input ports (Group 1: port 1
to port 4; Group 2: port 5 to port 8; Group 3: port
9 to port 12; Group 4: port 13 to port 16). These
ports receive the signal from the external alarm
source. There are two types: NO (Normally Open)
and NC (Normally Closed).
User's Manual
24
No. Port Name Function
When your alarm input device is using external
power, please make sure the alarm input device
and the Device have the same ground.
Alarm output port 1–3 (NO1–NO3;
C1–C3)
●
Three groups of alarm output ports (Group 1:
port NO1–C1, Group 2: port NO2–C2, Group 3:
port NO3–C3). These ports output alarm
signal to the alarm device. Please make sure
power supply to the external alarm device.
●
NO: Normally open alarm output port.
●
C: Alarm output public end.
Ground.
2 Video input port Connects to analog camera to input video signal.
3 Audio input port
Receives audio signal output from the devices
such as microphone. It corresponds to video
input port 1.
4 DB25 port
Connects to the audio splitter taken from the
package to convert to audio input port which
receives the audio signal from devices such as
microphone. It corresponds to video input ports
2–16.
5 Audio output port
Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the
sound box.
6 HDMI port
High denition audio and video signal output
port.
The port outputs the uncompressed high
denition video and multi-channel audio data to
the connected display with HDMI port.
7 USB port
Connects to external devices such as USB
storage device, keyboard and mouse.
8 Network port Connects to Ethernet port.
9 RS-485 communication port
Connects to the control devices such as speed
dome PTZ. RS-485_A port is connected by the
cable A and RS-485_B is connected to the cable
B.
10 Power input port Inputs 12 VDC power.
11 VGA port
Outputs analog video data to the connected
display with VGA port.
12 Power button Turns on/o the DVR.
13 Power cable fastener
Use a cable tie to secure the power cable on the
DVR to prevent loss.
User's Manual
25
No. Port Name Function
14
Ground terminal.
3.2.2 DH-XVR41xxC-I/DH-XVR41xxHS-I/DH-XVR51xxHS-I2/DH-
XVR51xxHS-I3/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-I2/DH-XVR51xxHS-4KL-I3
Figure 3-13 Rear panel
Table 3-12 Rear panel description
No. Port Name Function
1 Video input port Connects to analog camera to input video signal.
2 Audio input port
Receives audio signal output from the devices such as
microphone.
3 Audio output port
Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the sound
box.
4 HDMI port
High denition audio and video signal output port.
The port outputs the uncompressed high denition
video and multi-channel audio data to the connected
display with HDMI port.
5 Network port Connects to Ethernet port.
6
RS-485
communication port
Connects to the control devices such as speed dome
PTZ. RS-485_A port is connected by the cable A and
RS-485_B is connected to the cable B.
7 VGA port
Outputs analog video data to the connected display
with VGA port.
8 USB port
Connects to external devices such as USB storage
device, keyboard and mouse.
9 Power input port Inputs 12 VDC power.
10 Power cable fastener
Use clamp to secure the power cable on the DVR in
case there is any loss.
11
Ground terminal.
User's Manual
26
3.2.3 DH-XVR52xxA-I2/DH-XVR52xxA-I3/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-
I2/DH-XVR52xxA-4KL-I3/DHXVR42xxAN-I/DH-XVR42xxAN-
I(V2.0)/DH-XVR52xxAN-I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-I3/DH-
XVR52xxAN-4KL-I2/DH-XVR52xxAN-4KL-I3/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-
I2/DH-XVR72xxA-4K-I3/DH-XVR72xxA-4KL-I/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-
I2/DH-XVR72xxAN-4K-I3
Figure 3-14 Rear panel
Table 3-13 Rear panel description
No. Port Name Function
1
Ground terminal.
2
Alarm input port 1–16
Four groups of alarm input ports (Group 1: port 1 to
port 4; Group 2: port 5 to port 8; Group 3: port 9 to port
12; Group 4: port 13 to port 16). These ports receive the
signal from the external alarm source. There are two
types: NO (Normally Open) and NC (Normally Closed).
When your alarm input device is using external power,
please make sure the alarm input device and the DVR
connect to the same ground.
Alarm output port 1–3
(NO1–NO3;C1–C3)
●
Three groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port
NO1–C1, Group 2: port NO2–C2, Group 3: port NO3–
C3). These ports output alarm signal to the alarm
device. Please make sure power supply to the
external alarm device.
●
NO: Normally open alarm output port.
●
C: Alarm output public end.
Ground.
3 Video input port Connects to analog camera to input video signal.
4 Audio input port
Receives audio signal output from the devices such as
microphone.
User's Manual
27
No. Port Name Function
5 Audio output port
Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the sound
box.
6 HDMI port
High denition audio and video signal output port.
The port outputs the uncompressed high denition
video and multi-channel audio data to the connected
display with HDMI port.
7 USB port
Connects to the external devices such as keyboard,
mouse, and USB storage device.
8 Network port Connects to Ethernet port.
9 RS-485 communication port
Connects to the control devices such as speed dome
PTZ. RS-485_A port is connected by the cable A and
RS-485_B is connected to the cable B.
10 Power input port Inputs 12 VDC power.
11 VGA port
Outputs analog video data to the connected display
with VGA port.
12 Power button Turns on/o the DVR.
13 Power cable fastener
Use clamp to secure the power cable on the DVR in case
there is any loss.
3.2.4 DH-XVR82xxA-4K-I/DH-XVR82xxA-4KL-I
Figure 3-15 Rear panel
Table 3-14 Rear panel description
No. Port Name Function
1 Video input port Connects to analog camera to input video signal.
2 Audio output port
Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the
sound box.
3 MIC IN
Two-way talk input port which receives analog audio
signal output from the devices such as microphone
and pickup.
4 Audio input port
Receives audio signal output from the devices such
as microphone.
5 RS-232 debug COM
The port is used for general COM debug to congure
IP address or transfer transparent COM data.
User's Manual
28
No. Port Name Function
6
Alarm input port 1–16
4 groups of alarm input ports (Group 1: port 1 to port
4; Group 2: port 5 to port 8; Group 3: port 9 to port
12; Group 4: port 13 to port 16). These ports receive
the signal from the external alarm source. There are
two types: NO (normal open) and NC (normal close).
When your alarm input device is using external
power, please make sure the input device and the
DVR connect to the same ground.
Ground terminal.
7 VGA port
Outputs analog video data to the connected display
with VGA port.
8 Network port Connects to Ethernet port.
9 HDMI port
High denition audio and video signal output port.
The port outputs the uncompressed high denition
video and multi-channel audio data to the
connected display with HDMI port.
10 USB port
Connects to the external devices such as keyboard,
mouse, and USB storage device.
11 Power input port Inputs power.
12
Alarm output port 1–5
(NO1–NO5; C1–C5; NC5)
●
5 groups of alarm output ports (Group 1: port
NO1–C1, Group 2: port NO2–C2, Group 3: port
NO3–C3, Group 4：port NO4–C4, Group 5: port
NO5, C5, NC5). These ports output alarm signal to
the alarm device. Please make sure power supply
to the external alarm device.
●
NO: Normal open alarm output port.
●
C: Alarm output public end.
●
NC: Normal close alarm output port.
13 Power button Turns on/o the DVR.
14
Ground.
User's Manual
29
3.2.5 DH-XVR58xxS-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2/DH-XVR58xxS-
I3/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3/DH-XVR78xxS-4K-I2/DH-XVR78xxS-4K-
I3/DH-XVR88xxS-4KL-I
Figure 3-16 Rear panel
Table 3-15 Rear panel description
No. Port Name Function
1 GND Ground.
2 Power input port Inputs power.
3 Power button Turns on/o the Device.
4 Audio input port
Receives the analog audio signal output from the devices
such as microphone.
5 Audio input port (MIC IN)
Two-way talk input port which receives the analog audio
signal output from the devices such as microphone,
pickup.
6
Audio output port (MIC
OUT)
Two-way talk output port which outputs the analog
audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.
7 Audio output port
Outputs the analog audio signal to the devices such as
the sound box.
8 Video output port Connect to video output devices such as TV.
9
Alarm input port 1–16
●
Four groups of alarm output ports (Group 1: port 1 to
port 4; Group 2: port 5 to port 8; Group 3: port 9 to
port 12; Group 4: port 13 to port 16). These ports
receive the signal from the external alarm source.
There are two types; NO (Normally Open) and NC
(Normally Closed).
●
When your alarm input device is using external
power, please make sure the device and the DVR have
the same ground.
Alarm output port 1–5
(NO1–NO5; C1–C5; NC5)
●
Five groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port
NO1–C1, Group 2: port NO2–C2, Group 3: port NO3–
C3, Group 4：port NO4–C4, Group 5: port NO5, C5,
NC5). These ports output alarm signal to the alarm
User's Manual
30
No. Port Name Function
device. Please make sure power supply to the external
alarm device.
●
NO: Normally open alarm output port.
●
C: Alarm output public end.
●
NC: Normally closed alarm output port.
RS-485 communication
port
You can connect to the control devices such as speed
dome PTZ. RS-485_A port is connected by the cable A
and RS-485_B is connected to the cable B.
Four-wire full-duplex
RS-485 port (T+, T-, R+, R-)
Four-wire full-duplex 485 port. T+ and T- is the output
wire; R+ and R- is the input wire.
Control power output
(CTRL 12V)
Controls 12 VDC power output. It is to control the on-o
alarm relay output.
12V power output port
Provides power to external devices such as camera and
alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be
below 1A.
Ground.
10 Video input port Connect to analog camera to input video signal.
11 Network port Connects to Ethernet port.
12 VGA video output
Outputs analog video signal. It can connect to the
monitor to view analog video.
13 RS-232 debug COM
It is for general COM debug to congure IP address or
transfer transparent COM data.
14 HDMI port
High denition audio and video signal output port. It
outputs the same video source as VGA. It supports 4K
resolution output and supports mouse operation and
control.
Please note when the HDMI output resolution is 4K, the
VGA output stops.
15 USB port
Connects to the external devices such as keyboard,
mouse, and USB storage device.
16 eSATA port
External SATA port which connects to the device with
SATA port. Perform the jumper conguration when
connecting HDD.
User's Manual
31
3.2.6 DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I2-LP/DH-XVR58xxS-4KL-I3-LP/DH-
XVR78xxS-4KL-X-LP-V2
Figure 3-17 Rear panel
Table 3-16 Rear panel description
No. Port Name Function
1 Audio output port
Outputs the analog audio signal to the devices such as
the sound box.
2 Video output port Connect to video output devices such as TV.
3 Audio input port (MIC IN)
Two-way talk input port which receives the analog audio
signal output from the devices such as microphone,
pickup.
4 Audio output port (MIC OUT)
Two-way talk output port which outputs the analog
audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.
5 Audio input port
Receives the analog audio signal output from the devices
such as microphone.
6
Alarm input port 1–16
●
Four groups of alarm output ports (Group 1: port 1 to
port 4; Group 2: port 5 to port 8; Group 3: port 9 to
port 12; Group 4: port 13 to port 16). These ports
receive the signal from the external alarm source.
There are two types; NO (Normally Open) and NC
(Normally Closed).
●
When your alarm input device is using external
power, please make sure the device and the DVR have
the same ground.
Alarm output port 1–5 (NO1–
NO5; C1–C5; NC5)
●
Five groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port
NO1–C1, Group 2: port NO2–C2, Group 3: port NO3–
C3, Group 4：port NO4–C4, Group 5: port NO5, C5,
NC5). These ports output alarm signal to the alarm
device. Please make sure power supply to the
external alarm device.
●
NO: Normally open alarm output port.
●
C: Alarm output public end.
●
NC: Normally closed alarm output port.
User's Manual
32
No. Port Name Function
RS-485 communication port
You can connect to the control devices such as speed
dome PTZ. RS-485_A port is connected by the cable A
and RS-485_B is connected to the cable B.
Four-wire full-duplex RS-485
port (T+, T-, R+, R-)
Four-wire full-duplex 485 port. T+ and T- is the output
wire; R+ and R- is the input wire.
Control power output (CTRL
12V)
Controls 12 VDC power output. It is to control the on-o
alarm relay output.
12V power output port
Provides power to external devices such as camera and
alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be
below 1A.
G Ground.
7 RS-232 debug COM
It is for general COM debug to congure IP address or
transfer transparent COM data.
8 VGA video output
Outputs analog video signal. It can connect to the
monitor to view analog video.
9 Power button Turns on/o the Device.
10 Power input port Inputs power.
11 Loop out
Outputs the video signal of the corresponding video
input port.
12 Video input port Connect to analog camera to input video signal.
13 Network port Connects to Ethernet port.
14 USB port
Connects to the external devices such as keyboard,
mouse, and USB storage device.
15 eSATA port
External SATA port which connects to the device with
SATA port. Perform the jumper conguration when
connecting HDD.
16 HDMI port
High denition audio and video signal output port. It
outputs the same video source as VGA. It supports 4K
resolution output and supports mouse operation and
control.
Note when the HDMI output resolution is 4K, the VGA
output stops.
17 GND Ground.
User's Manual
33
3.2.7 DH-XVR54xxL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I2/DH-XVR54xxL-
I3/DH-XVR54xxL-4KL-I3/DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I2/DH-XVR74xxL-4K-I3
Figure 3-18 Rear panel (1)
Figure 3-19 Rear panel (2)
Figure 3-20 Rear panel (3)
User's Manual
34
Table 3-17 Rear panel description
No. Port Name Function
1
Audio output port
(MIC OUT)
Two-way talk output port which outputs the analog audio signal
to the devices such as the sound box.
2
Audio input port
(MIC IN)
Two-way talk input port which receives the analog audio signal
output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.
3 Video output port Connect to video output devices such as TV.
4 Audio output port
Outputs the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound
box.
5 Audio input port
Receives the analog audio signal output from the devices such as
microphone.
6 Video input port Connect to analog camera to input video signal.
7
Alarm input port 1–
16
●
Four groups of alarm output ports (Group 1: port 1 to port 4;
Group 2: port 5 to port 8; Group 3: port 9 to port 12; Group 4:
port 13 to port 16). These ports receive the signal from the
external alarm source. There are two types; NO (Normally
Open) and NC (Normally Closed).
●
When your alarm input device is using external power, make
sure the device and the DVR have the same ground.
Alarm output port
1–5 (NO1–NO5;C1–
C5; NC5)
●
Five groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port NO1–C1,
Group 2: port NO2–C2, Group 3: port NO3–C3, Group 4：port
NO4–C4, Group 5: port NO5, C5, NC5). These ports output
alarm signal to the alarm device. Make sure power supply to
the external alarm device.
●
NO: Normally open alarm output port.
●
C: Alarm output public end.
●
NC: Normally closed alarm output port.
RS-485
communication
port
You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
RS-485_A port is connected by the cable A and RS-485_B is
connected to the cable B.
Four-wire full-
duplex RS-485 port
(T+, T-, R+, R-)
Four-wire full-duplex 485 port. T+ and T- is the output wire; R+
and R- is the input wire.
Control power
output (CTRL 12V)
Controls 12 VDC power output. It is to control the on-o alarm
relay output.
12V power output
port
Provides power to external devices such as camera and alarm
device. Note the supplying power shall be below 1A.
Ground.
8 Network port Connects to Ethernet port.
9 RS-232 debug COM
It is for general COM debug to congure IP address or transfer
transparent COM data.
10 USB port
Connects to the external devices such as keyboard, mouse, and
USB storage device.
User's Manual
35
No. Port Name Function
11 VGA video output
Outputs analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to
view analog video.
12 eSATA port
External SATA port which connects to the device with SATA port.
Perform the jumper conguration when connecting HDD.
13 HDMI port
High denition audio and video signal output port. It outputs the
same video source as VGA. It supports 4K resolution output and
supports mouse operation and control.
Note when the HDMI output resolution is 4K, the VGA output
stops.
14 Power switch Turns on/o the Device.
15 Power input port Inputs power.
16 GND Ground.
3.2.8 DH-XVR1Bxx-I/DH-XVR1BxxH-I
Figure 3-21 Rear panel
Table 3-18 Rear panel description
No. Port Name Function
1 Video input port Connects to analog camera to input video signal.
2 Audio input port
Receives audio signal output from the devices such as
microphone.
3
Audio output
port
Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.
4 GND Ground.
5
Power cable
fastener
Use clamp to secure the power cable on the DVR in case there is
any loss.
6
VGA video
output
Outputs analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view
analog video.
7 HDMI port
High denition audio and video signal output port. It outputs the
same video source as VGA. It supports 4K resolution output and
supports mouse operation and control.
User's Manual
36
No. Port Name Function
Note when the HDMI output resolution is 4K, the VGA output
stops.
8 USB port
Connects to external devices such as USB storage device,
keyboard and mouse.
9 Network port Connects to Ethernet port.
10 Power input port Inputs 12 VDC power.
3.2.9 DH-XVR51xxC-I3/DH-XVR51xxC-4KL-I3
Figure 3-22 Rear panel
Table 3-19 Pear panel description
No. Port Name Function
1
Video input
port
Connects to analog camera to input video signal.
2 USB port
Connects to external devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and
mouse.
3 VGA port Outputs analog video data to the connected display with VGA port.
4 HDMI port
High denition audio and video signal output port.
The port outputs the uncompressed high denition video and multi-
channel audio data to the connected display with HDMI port.
5 Network port Connects to Ethernet port.
6
Power input
port
Inputs 12 VDC power.
7
Ground terminal.
3.3 Remote Control Operations
Please note the remote control is not our standard accessory and might not be included in the
accessory bag. It is supplied dependent on the model you purchased.
User's Manual
37
Figure 3-23 Remote control
Table 3-20 Remote control description
No. Name Function
1 Power button Press this button to boot up or shut down the device.
2 Address
Press this button to input device serial number, so that
you can control the Device.
3 Forward Multi-step forward speed and normal speed playback.
4 Slow motion Multi-step slow motion speed or normal playback.
5 Next record
In playback state, press this button to play back the
next video.
6 Previous record
In playback state, press this button to play back the
previous video.
7 Play/Pause
●
In normal playback state, press this button to pause
playback.
●
In pause state, press this button to resume to
normal playback.
●
In live view window page, press this button to enter
video search menu.
8 Reverse/pause
In the reverse playback state, press this button to
pause reverse playback.
In the reverse playback pause state, press this button
to resume to playback reversing state.
User's Manual
38
No. Name Function
9 Esc.
Go back to previous menu or cancel current operation
(close front page or control).
10 Record
●
Start or stop record manually.
●
In record page, use the direction buttons to select
the channel that you want to record.
●
Press this button for at least 1.5 seconds, and the
manual record page will be displayed.
11 Direction keys
Switch between current activated controls by going
left or right.
In playback state, the keys control the playback
progress bar.
Aux function (such as operating the PTZ menu).
12 Enter/menu key
●
Conrms an operation.
●
Go to the OK button.
●
Go to the menu.
13
Multiple-window
switch
Switch between multiple-window and one-window.
14 Fn
●
In single-channel monitoring mode, press this
button to display the PTZ control and color setting
functions.
●
Switch the PTZ control menu in PTZ control page.
●
In motion detection page, press this button with
direction keys to complete setup.
●
In text mode, press and hold this button to delete
the last character. To use the clearing function:
Long press this button for 1.5 seconds.
●
In HDD menu, switch HDD recording time and other
information as indicated in the pop-up message.
15 Alphanumeric keys
●
Input password, numbers.
●
Switch channel.
●
Press Shift to switch the input method.
3.4 Mouse Operations
The operations are based on the considerations for right-handed users.
Table 3-21 Mouse operations
Operation Function
Click left mouse
button
Password input dialogue box pops up if you have not logged in yet.
In live view window page, you can go to the main menu.
User's Manual
39
Operation Function
When you have selected one menu item, click it to view menu content.
Implement the control operation.
Modify checkbox or motion detection status.
Click combo box to pop up drop-down list.
In text box, click the corresponding button on the panel to enter a numeral
or English character (small/capitalized).
●
In English input mode: Click
to enter a backspace and click to
delete the previous character.
●
In numeral input mode: Click
to clear and click to delete the
previous character.
Double-click left
mouse button
Implement special control operations such as double-click one item in the
le list to play back the video.
In multiple-window mode, double-click one channel to view in full-window.
Double-click current video again to go back to previous multiple-window
mode.
Right-click
Right-click in live view window page, the shortcut menu is displayed. For
dierent series product, the shortcut menu may vary.
Exit current menu without saving the modication.
Click scroll wheel
button
In numeral input box: Increase or decrease numeral value.
Switch the items in the combo box.
Page up or page down.
Point to select and
move
Select current control and move it.
Dragging a
selection box with
left mouse button
Select motion detection zone.
Select privacy mask zone.
User's Manual
40
4 Connection
This chapter introduces the typical connection diagrams and ports connections.
4.1 Typical Connection Diagram
●
The following gure is for reference only.
Figure 4-1 Connection diagram
4.2 Connecting to Video and Audio Input and Output
4.2.1 Video Input
The video input interface is BNC. The input video format includes: PAL/NTSC BNC (1.0 VP-P, 75 Ω).
The video signal should comply with your national standards.
The input video signal shall have high SNR, low distortion; low interference, natural color, and
suitable lightness.
Guarantee the stability and reliability of the camera signal
The camera shall be installed in a cool, dry place away from the conditions such as direct sunlight,
inammable, and explosive substances.
The camera and the DVR should have the same grounding to ensure the normal operation of the
camera.
User's Manual
41
Guarantee stability and reliability of the transmission line
Please use high quality, sound shielded BNC. Please select suitable BNC model according to the
transmission distance.
If the distance is too long, you should use twisted pair cable, and you can add video compensation
devices or use optical ber to ensure video quality.
You should keep the video signal away from the strong electromagnetic interference, especially the
high tension current.
Keep connection lugs in well contact
The signal line and shielded wire should be xed rmly and in well connection. Avoid dry joint, lap
welding, and oxidation.
4.2.2 Video Output
Video output includes a BNC (PAL/NTSC1.0 VP-P, 75 Ω) output, a VGA output, and HDMI output.
System supports BNC, VGA and HDMI output at the same time.
When you are using pc-type monitor to replace the monitor, please pay attention to the following
points:
●
To defer aging, do not allow the pc monitor to run for a long time.
●
Regular demagnetization will keep device maintain proper status.
●
Keep it away from strong electromagnetic interference devices.
Using TV as video output device is not a reliable substitution method. You also need to reduce the
working hour and control the interference from power supply and other devices. The low quality TV
may result in device damage.
4.2.3 Audio Input
This series of products audio input port adopt BNC port.
Due to high impedance of audio input, please use active sound pick-up.
Audio transmission is similar to video transmission. Try to avoid interference, dry joint, loose
contact and it shall be away from high tension current.
4.2.4 Audio Output
The audio output signal parameter is usually over 200 mv 1 KΩ (BNC or RCA). It can directly connect
to low impedance earphone, active sound box or amplier-drive audio output device.
If the sound box and the pick-up cannot be separated spatially, it is easy to arouse squeaking. In
this case you can adopt the following measures:
●
Use better sound pick-up with better directing property.
●
Reduce the volume of the sound box.
●
Using more sound-absorbing materials in decoration can reduce voice echo and improve
acoustics environment.
●
Adjust the layout of speaker and pickup to reduce squeaking.
User's Manual
42
4.3 Connecting to Alarm Input and Output
Please read the followings before connecting.
Alarm input
●
Make sure alarm input mode is grounding alarm input.
●
Grounding signal is needed for alarm input.
●
Alarm input needs the low level voltage signal.
●
Alarm input mode can be either NC (Normally Closed) or NO (Normally Open).
●
When you are connecting two DVRs or you are connecting one DVR and one other device, use a
relay to separate them.
Alarm output
The alarm output port should not be connected to high power load directly (It shall be less than 1A)
to avoid high current which might result in relay damage. Use the contactor to realize the
connection between the alarm output port and the load. The next device connected to the port
must meet the re enclosure requirements.
How to connect PTZ decoder
●
Ensure the decoder has the same grounding with DVR; otherwise the PTZ might not be
controlled. Shielded twisted wire is recommended and the shielded layer is used to connect to
the grounding.
●
Avoid high voltage. Ensure proper wiring and some thunder protection measures.
●
For too long signal wires, 120 Ω should be parallel connected between A, B lines on the far end
to reduce reection and guarantee the signal quality.
●
"485 A, B" of DVR cannot parallel connect with "485 port" of other device.
●
The voltage between of A, B lines of the decoder should be less than 5 V.
Make sure the front-end device has soundly earthed
Improper grounding might result in chip damage.
4.3.1 Introducing Alarm Port
The alarm input ports are dependent on the model you purchased.
User's Manual
43
Figure 4-2 Alarm ports
Table 4-1 Alarm port description
Icon Description
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13,
14, 15, 16
ALARM 1 to ALARM 16. The alarm becomes active in low
voltage.
NO1 C1, NO2 C2, NO3 C3
There are four groups of normally open activation output
(on/o button).
Ground cable.
485 A/B
485 communication port. They are used to control devices
such as decoder. 120 Ω should be parallel connected
between A, B lines if there are too many PTZ decoders.
4.3.2 Alarm Input
Refer to the following gure for more information.
●
Grounding alarm inputs which includes NO (Normally Open) and NC (Normally Closed) type.
●
Parallel connect COM end and GND end of the alarm detector (Provide external power to the
alarm detector).
●
Parallel connect the Ground of the DVR and the ground of the alarm detector.
●
Connect the NC port of the alarm sensor to the DVR alarm input (ALARM).
●
Use the same ground with that of DVR if you use external power to the alarm device.
Figure 4-3 Alarm input
4.3.3 Alarm Output
●
Provide external power to external alarm device.
●
To avoid overloading, read the following relay parameters table carefully.
User's Manual
44
●
RS-485 A/B cable is for the A/B cable of the PTZ decoder.
4.3.4 Alarm Output Relay Parameters
Refer to the actual product for relay model information.
Table 4-2 Alarm output relay parameters
Model HFD23/005-1ZS HRB1-S-DC5V
Material of the touch
AgNi+ gold-
plating
AuAg10/AgNi10/CuNi30
Rating
(Resistance Load)
30 VDC 1 A/125 VAC
0.5 A
24 VDC 1 A/125
VAC 2 A
24 VDC 1 A/125 VAC 2 A
62.5 VA/30 W 250 VA/48 W 250 VA/48 W
125 VAC/60 VDC 125 VAC/60 VDC 125 VAC/60 VDC
2 A 2 A 2 A
Insulation
400 VAC 1 minute
500 VAC 1
minute
500 VAC 1 minute
1000 VAC 1 minute
1000 VAC 1
minute
1000 VAC 1 minute
Turn-on Time
5 ms max 5 ms max
Turn-o Time
Longevity
1 × 10
7
times
5 × 10
6
times
(300 times/MIN)
5 × 10
6
times
(300 times/MIN)
1 × 10
5
times
2.5 × 10
4
times
(30 times/MIN)
2.5 × 10
4
times
(30 times/MIN)
Working Temperature –30 °C to +70 °C –40 °C to +70 °C
User's Manual
45
5 Local Congurations
Read the following notes prior to using the Device.
●
The gures in the Manual are used for introducing the operations and only for reference. The
actual interface might be dierent dependent on the model you purchased.
●
The Manual is a general document for introducing the product, so there might be some
functions described for the Device in the Manual not apply to the model you purchased.
●
Conventions for mouse operations on a menu.
Click: On the menu, click the mouse once on an option to enter the option setting.
Right-click: On any page, right-click the mouse once to return to the previous level.
5.1 Initial Settings
5.1.1 Booting Up
●
Ensure the input voltage corresponds to the power requirement of the Device. Power on the
Device after the power cable is properly connected.
●
To protect the Device, connect the Device with the power cable rst, and then connect to the
power source.
●
To ensure the stable work of the Device and the external devices connected to the Device and
to prolong the HDD life, it is recommended to refer to the national related standard to use the
power source that provides stable voltage with less interference from ripples. UPS power source
is recommended.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the Device to the monitor.
Step 2 Plug in the power cable to the Device.
Step 3 Press the power button to turn on the Device. The power indicator light is on.
On the connected monitor, the live view screen is displayed by default. If you turn on the
Device during the time period that is congured for recording, the system starts
recording after it is turned on, and you will see the icon indicating recording status is
working in the specic channels.
5.1.2 Initializing the Device
Background Information
When booting up for the rst time, you need to congure the password information for admin (by
default).
To secure the Device, we strongly recommend you properly keep the password for admin and
modify it regularly.
Procedure
Step 1 Turn on the Device.
User's Manual
46
Figure 5-1 Location, language and video standard
Step 2 Select your location from the drop-down list, then language and video standard will
match your location automatically. You can change the language and video standard
manually.
Step 3 Click Next.
Step 4 Select the checkbox that I have read and agree to all terms , and then click Next.
Figure 5-2 Time
Step 5 Select system zone, congure system time, and then click Next.
User's Manual
47
Figure 5-3 Enter password
Step 6 Congure the password information for admin.
Table 5-1 Password information
Parameter Description
User By default, the user is admin.
Password
In the Password box, enter the password for admin.
The new password can be set from 8 characters through 32
characters and contains at least two types from number, letter and
special characters (excluding"'", """, ";", ":" and "&").
Conrm Password
Prompt Hint
In the Prompt Hint box, enter the information that can remind you
of the password.
On the login interface, click , the prompt will display to help you
nd back the password.
Step 7 Click Next.
User's Manual
48
Figure 5-4 Unlock pattern
Step 8 Draw an unlock pattern.
After the setting is completed, the Password Protection page is displayed.
●
The pattern that you want to set must cross at least four points.
●
If you do not want to congure the unlock pattern, click Skip.
●
Once you have congured the unlock pattern, the system will require the unlock
pattern as the default login method. If you skip this setting, enter the password for
login.
Figure 5-5 Password protection
Step 9 Congure the protection parameters for password.
After conguration, if you forget the password for admin user, you can reset the password
through the reserved email address or security questions.
If you do not want to congure the settings, disable the email address and security
questions functions on the interface.
User's Manual
49
Table 5-2 Password protection parameters
Password Protection Mode Description
Reserved Email
Enter the reserved email address.
In the Reserved Email box, enter an email address for
password reset. If you forget the password, enter the
security code that you will get from this reserved email
address to reset the password of admin.
Security Questions
Congure the security questions and answers.
If you forget the password, enter the answers to the
questions can make you reset the password.
If you want to congure the email or security questions function later or you want to change the
congurations, select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > Password Reset.
Step 10 Click OK to complete the settings.
Step 11 Select I have read and agree to all terms checkbox.
Step 12 Click Next.
The Startup Wizard interface is displayed.
5.1.3 Resetting Password
You can reset the password by the following methods when you forget the password for admin
account.
●
If the password reset function is enabled, you can use mobile phone to scan the QR code to
reset the password. For details, see "5.1.3.2 Resetting Password on Local Interface".
●
If the password reset function is disabled, there are two situations:
If you congured security questions, you can nd back the password by the security
questions.
If you did not congure the security questions, you can only use the reset button on the
mainboard to restore the Device to factory default. For details, see "5.1.3.3 Using Reset
Button on the Mainboard".
The reset button is available on select models.
5.1.3.1 Enabling Password Reset Function
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > Account > Password Reset.
User's Manual
50
Figure 5-6 Password reset
Step 2 Enable the Password Reset function.
This function is enabled by default.
Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.
When Password reset function is disabled, you can retrieve password through following
ways:
●
You can retrieve password through resetting password on local interface or using
Reset button on the mainboard when the device supports Reset button.
●
You can only retrieve password through resetting password on local interface (make
sure that security questions are preset) when the device does not support Reset
button.
5.1.3.2 Resetting Password on Local Interface
Procedure
Step 1 Enter the login page.
●
If you have congured unlock pattern, the unlock pattern login page is displayed. Click
Forgot Pattern, the password login page is displayed.
●
If you did not congure unlock pattern, the password login page is displayed. Click
to display the password with plaintext.
To log in from other user account, on the unlock pattern login page, click Switch User ; or
on the password login page, in the User Name list, select other users to log in.
User's Manual
51
Figure 5-7 Login (1)
Figure 5-8 Login (2)
Step 2 Click .
●
If you have set the reserved email address, the Prompt message page is displayed.
●
If you did not set the reserved email address, the email entering page is displayed. See
Step 3. Enter the email address, and then click Next , the Prompt message page is
displayed.
User's Manual
52
Figure 5-9 Note
Step 3 Click OK.
After clicking OK , the system will collect your information for password reset, and the
information includes but not limited to email address, and device serial number. Read the
prompt carefully before clicking OK.
User's Manual
53
Figure 5-10 Reset mode (email)
Figure 5-11 Reset mode (app)
Step 4 Reset the password.
●
QR code
Follow the on-screen instructions to get the security code in your reserved email
address. In the Security Code box, enter the security code.
You can get the security code twice by scanning the same QR code. If you need to
get the security code once again, refresh the page.
Use the security code received in your email box to reset the password within 24
hours; otherwise the security code becomes invalid.
●
App
User's Manual
54
Select QR Code for Binding Device as Reset Mode, and then follow the on-screen
instructions to get the security code on your DMSS app. In the Security Code box,
enter the security code.
●
Security questions
a. For Reset Mode , select Security Questions.
If you did not congure the security questions before, in the Reset Type list, there
will be no Security Questions.
b. In the Answer box, enter the correct answers.
Figure 5-12 Security questions
Step 5 Click Next.
User's Manual
55
Figure 5-13 New password
Step 6 In the New Password box, enter the new password and enter it again in the Conrm
Password box.
Step 7 Click Save. The password resetting is started.
Step 8 Click OK.
A pop-up message is displayed asking if you want to sync the password with the remote
devices.
●
Click Cancel, the resetting is nished.
●
Click OK, the Sync Info page is displayed.
User's Manual
56
Figure 5-14 Sync password
This message appears only when there are digital channels instead of only analog
channels.
Figure 5-15 Sync info
User's Manual
57
5.1.3.3 Using Reset Button on the Mainboard
Background Information
You can always use the reset button on the mainboard to reset the Device to the factory default.
The reset button is available on select models.
Procedure
Step 1 Disconnect the Device from power source, and then remove the cover panel. For details
about removing the cover panel, see "2.2 Installing HDD".
Step 2 Find the reset button on the mainboard, and then press and hold the reset button for 5
seconds to 10 seconds.
Figure 5-16 Reset button
Step 3 Restart the Device.
After the Device is rebooted, the settings have been restored to the factory default. You
can start resetting the password.
5.1.4 Setting Up with the Startup Wizard
5.1.4.1 Entering Startup Wizard
The Startup Wizard helps you congure the basic settings to set up the Device.
After you have initialized the Device, the Startup Wizard page is displayed.
User's Manual
58
Figure 5-17 Startup wizard
●
If you select the Auto-check for updates checkbox, the system will notify you automatically
when updates are available.
●
After the auto-check function is enabled, to notify you to update timely, the system will collect
the information such as IP address, device name, rmware version, and device serial number.
The collected information is only used to verify the legality of the Device and push upgrade
notices.
●
If you clear the Auto-check for updates checkbox, the system will not perform automatic
checks.
5.1.4.2 Conguring General Settings
Background Information
You can congure the general settings for the Device such as Device name, language, and settings
for instant playback.
You can also congure general settings by selecting Main Menu > SYSTEM > General > Basic.
Procedure
Step 1 On the Startup Wizard page, click Next.
User's Manual
59
Figure 5-18 Basic
Step 2 Congure the basic settings parameters.
Table 5-3 Basic settings
Parameter Description
Device Name In the Device Name box, enter the Device name.
Device No. In the Device No. box, enter a number for the Device.
Language In the Language list, select a language for the Device system.
Video Standard
In the Video Standard list, select PAL or NTSC according to your
actual situation.
Instant Playback
In the Instant Playback box, enter the time length for playing back
the recoded video.
On the live view control bar, click the instant playback button to play
back the recorded video within the congured time.
Logout Time
In the Logout Time box, enter the standby time for the Device. The
Device automatically logs out when it is not working for the
congured time period. You need to log in to the Device again.
The value ranges from 0 to 60. 0 indicates there is not standby time
for the Device.
Click Monitor Channel(s) when logout. You can select the channels
that you want to continue monitoring when you logged out.
Navigation Bar
Enable the navigation bar. When you click on the live view screen,
the navigation bar is displayed.
User's Manual
60
Parameter Description
Mouse Pointer Speed
Adjust the speed of double-click by moving the slider.
The bigger the value is, the faster the double-clicking speed must be.
5.1.4.3 Conguring Date and Time Settings
You can congure the system time, choose the time zone, set the daylight saving time, and enable
the NTP server.
You can also congure date and time settings by selecting Main Menu > SYSTEM > General >
Date &Time.
Procedure
Step 1 After you have congured the general settings, on the General page, click Next.
Figure 5-19 Date&Time
Step 2 Congure the settings for date and time parameters.
Table 5-4 Date and time parameters
Parameter Description
System Time
In the System Time box, enter time for the system.
Click the time zone list, you can select a time zone for the
system, and the time in adjust automatically.
Do not change the system time randomly; otherwise the
recorded video cannot be searched. It is recommended to
avoid the recoding period or stop recording rst before you
change the system time.
Time Zone In the Time Zone list, select a time zone for the system.
Date Format In the Date Format list, select a date format for the system.
User's Manual
61
Parameter Description
Date Separator
In the Date Separator list, select a separator style for the
date.
Time Format
In the Time Format list, select 12-HOUR or 24-HOUR for the
time display style.
DST
Enable the Daylight Saving Time function. Click Week or click
Date.
Start Time
Congure the start time and end time for the DST.
End Time
NTP
Enable the NTP function to sync the Device time with the NTP
server.
If NTP is enabled, device time will be automatically
synchronized with server.
Serve Address
In the Server Address box, enter the IP address or domain
name of the corresponding NTP server.
Click Manual Update, the Device starts syncing with the
server immediately.
Port
The system supports TCP protocol only and the default
setting is 123.
Interval
In the Interval box, enter the amount of time that you want
the Device to sync time with the NTP server. The value ranges
from 0 to 65535.
5.1.4.4 Conguring Network Settings
Background Information
You can congure the basic network settings such as net mode, IP version, and IP address of the
Device.
You can also congure network settings by selecting Main Menu > NETWORK > TCP/IP.
Procedure
Step 1 After you have congured the date and time settings, on the Date &Time page, click
Next.
User's Manual
62
Figure 5-20 TCP/IP
Step 2 Congure the settings for network parameters.
Table 5-5 Network parameters
Parameter Description
IP Version
In the IP Version list, you can select IPv4 or IPv6. Both versions are
supported for access.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the Device.
DHCP
Enable the DHCP function. The IP address, subnet mask and default
gateway are not available for conguration once DHCP is enabled.
●
If DHCP is eective, the obtained information will display in the
IP Address box, Subnet Mask box and Default Gateway box. If
not, all values show 0.0.0.0.
●
If you want manually congure the IP information, disable the
DHCP function rst.
●
If PPPoE connection is successful, the IP address, subnet mask,
default gateway, and DHCP are not available for conguration.
IP Address
Enter the IP address and congure the corresponding subnet mask
and default gateway.
IP address and default gateway must be in the same network
segment.
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
DNS DHCP Enable the DHCP function to get the DNS address from router.
Preferred DNS In the Preferred DNS box, enter the IP address of DNS.
Alternate DNS In the Alternate DNS box, enter the IP address of alternate DNS.
MTU
In the MTU box, enter a value for network card. The value ranges
from 1280 byte through 1500 byte. The default is 1500.
User's Manual
63
Parameter Description
The suggested MTU values are as below.
●
1500: The biggest value of Ethernet information package. This
value is typically selected if there is no PPPoE or VPN connection,
and it is also the default value of some routers, network adapters
and switches.
●
1492: Optimized value for PPPoE.
●
1468: Optimized value for DHCP.
●
1450: Optimized value for VPN.
Test
Click Test to test if the entered IP address and gateway are
interworking.
5.1.4.5 Conguring P2P Settings
Background Information
You can add the Device into your phone client or the platform to manage.
You can also congure P2P function by selecting Main Menu > Network > P2P.
Make sure the DVR is connected into the Internet, and if yes, in the Status box of the P2P page, it
shows Online.
Procedure
Step 1 After you have congured the network settings, on the Network page, click Next.
Figure 5-21 P2P
Step 2 Enable the P2P function.
After the P2P function is enabled and connected to the Internet, the system will collect
your information for remote access, and the information includes but not limited to email
address, MAC address, and device serial number.
User's Manual
64
You can start adding the device.
●
Mobile Client: Use your mobile phone to scan the QR code to add the device into the
Cell Phone Client, and then you can start accessing the Device.
●
Platform: Obtain the Device SN by scanning the QR code. Go to the P2P management
platform and add the Device SN into the platform. Then you can access and manage
the device in the WAN. For details, refer to the P2P operation manual.
●
You can also view the QR code of Mobile Client and Device SN by clicking
on the
upper-right corner of the pages after you have entered the Main Menu.
●
If selection of this function is canceled, the Note page is displayed. Choose to enable
it or not according to your actual need.
Figure 5-22 Note
To use this function, this section uses adding device into Mobile Client as an example.
The following steps are for reference only. Refer to the user's manual of the mobile client
for detailed instructions.
a. Use your phone to scan the QR code under Mobile Client to download the
application.
b.
Step 3 On your phone, open the application, and then tap .
a. Tap Device Manager.
b. Tap
on the upper-right corner.
The page requiring device initialization is displayed. A pop-up message reminding you
to make sure the Device is initialized is displayed.
c. Tap OK.
●
If the Device has not been initialized, Tap Device Initialization to perform
initializing by following the onscreen instructions.
●
If the Device has been initialized, you can start adding it directly.
d. Tap Add Device.
You can add wireless device or wired device. The Manual uses adding wired device as
an example.
e. Tap P2P.
f. Enter a name for the DVR, the username and password, scan the QR code under
Device SN.
User's Manual
65
g. Tap Start Live Preview.
The Device is added and displayed on the live view page of the cell phone.
5.1.4.6 Conguring Encode Settings
Background Information
You can congure the settings of main stream and sub stream for the Device.
You can also congure encode settings by selecting Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode > Audio/
Video.
Procedure
Step 1 After you have congured the P2P settings, on the Audio/Video page, click Next.
Figure 5-23 Encode
Step 2 Congure the settings for the main/sub streams parameters.
Table 5-6 Parameter description
Parameter Description
Channel
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to congure the
settings for.
Smart Codec
Enable the smart codec function. This function can reduce the video bit
stream for non-important recorded video to maximize the storage
space.
User's Manual
66
Parameter Description
Type
●
Main Stream: In the Type list, select General, MD (Motion Detect),
or Alarm.
●
Sub Stream: This setting is not congurable.
Compression
In the Compression list, select the encode mode.
●
H.265: Main prole encoding. This setting is recommended.
●
H.264H: High prole encoding. Low bit stream with high denition.
●
H.264: Main prole encoding.
●
H.264B: Baseline prole encoding. This setting requires higher bit
stream compared with other settings for the same denition.
Resolution
In the Resolution list, select resolution for the video.
The maximum video resolution might be dierent dependent on your
device model.
Frame Rate (FPS)
Congure the frames per second for the video. The higher the value is,
the clearer and smoother the image will become. Frame rate changes
along with the resolution.
Generally, in PAL format, you can select the value from 1 through 25; in
NTSC format, you can select the value from 1 through 30. However, the
actual range of frame rate that you can select depends on the capability
of the Device.
Bit Rate Type
In the Bit Rate Type list, select CBR (Constant Bit Rate) or VBR
(Variable Bit Rate). If you select CBR, the image quality cannot be
congured; if you select VBR, the image quality can be congured.
Quality
This function is available if you select VBR in the Bit Rate List.
The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.
I Frame Interval The interval between two reference frames.
Bit Rate (Kb/S)
In the Bit Rate list, select a value or enter a customized value to change
the image quality. The bigger the value is, the better the image will
become.
Video Enable the function for sub stream.
Audio
Click More , the More page is displayed.
●
Audio: This function is enabled by default for main stream. You need
to manually enable it for sub stream 1. Once this function is enabled,
the recorded video le is composite audio and video stream.
●
Audio Source: In the Audio Source list, you can select Local and
HDCVI.
Local: The audio signal is input from Audio In port.
HDCVI: The audio signal is input from HDCVI camera.
●
Compression: In the Compression list, select a format that you
need.
Audio Source
Compression
User's Manual
67
5.1.4.7 Conguring Snapshot Settings
You can congure the basic snapshot settings such as quantity of snapshot each time, channel(s) to
take snapshot, and image size and quality of snapshot.
You can also congure general settings by selecting Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode >
Snapshot.
Procedure
Step 1 After you have congured the encode settings, on the Encode page, click Next.
Figure 5-24 Snapshot
Step 2 Congure the settings for the snapshot parameters.
Table 5-7 Snapshot parameters
Parameter Description
Manual Snapshot
In the Manual Snapshot list, select how many snapshots you want to
take each time.
Channel
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to congure the
settings for.
Type
In the Mode list, you can select Human Face, Event, or General as the
event type for which you want to take a snapshot.
●
Scheduled : The snapshot is taken during the scheduled period.
●
Event : The snapshot is taken when there is an alarm event occurs,
such as motion detection event, video loss, and local alarms.
●
Face Snapshot: The snapshot is taken when the face is detected.
The face detection function is support only with the Channel 1.
Size
In the Size list, select a value for the image. The bigger the value is, the
better the image will become.
Quality
Congure the image quality by 6 levels. The higher the level is, the
better the image will become.
Interval Congure or customize the snapshot frequency.
User's Manual
68
5.1.4.8 Conguring Basic Storage Settings
You can congure the settings for the situations when HDD is full, le length and time length of
recorded video, and the settings if to auto-delete the old les.
You can also congure basic storage settings by selecting Main Menu > STORAGE > Basic.
Procedure
Step 1 After you have congured the encode settings, on the Snapshot page, click Next.
Figure 5-25 Basic
Step 2 Congure the basic storage settings parameters.
Table 5-8 Basic storage settings
Parameter Description
Disk Full
Congure the settings for the situation when all the read/
write discs are full, and there are no more free discs.
●
Select Stop to stop recording.
●
Select Overwrite to overwrite the recorded video les
always from the earliest time.
The locked recorded video les will not be overwritten.
Create Video Files
Congure the time length and le length for each recorded
video.
Delete Expired Files
Congure whether to delete the old les and if yes, in the
Delete Expired Files list, select Custom to congure the
time length for how long you want to keep the old les.
5.1.4.9 Conguring Recorded Video Storage Schedule
You can congure the schedule for the recorded video such as channels to record, alarm settings,
and the armed period.
User's Manual
69
You can also congure recorded video storage settings by selecting Main Menu > STORAGE >
Schedule > Record.
Procedure
Step 1 After you have congured the basic storage settings, on the Basic page, click Next.
Figure 5-26 Record
Step 2 Congure the record settings parameters.
Table 5-9 Record settings
Parameter Description
Channel In the Channel list, select a channel to record the video.
Pre-record
In the Pre-record list, enter the amount of time that you want
to start the recording in advance.
Redundancy
If there are several HDDs installed to the Device, you can set one
of the HDDs as the redundant HDD to save the recorded les
into dierent HDDs. In case one of the HDDs is damaged, you
can nd the backup in the other HDD.
●
Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Disk Manager, and then
set a HDD as redundant HDD.
●
Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Schedule > Record, and
then select the Redundancy checkbox.
If the selected channel is not recording, the redundancy
function takes eect next time you record no matter you
select the checkbox or not.
If the selected channel is recording, the current recorded
les will be packed, and then start recording according to
the new schedule.
●
This function is available on select models.
●
The redundant HDD only back up the recorded videos but
not snapshots.
User's Manual
70
Parameter Description
Event type
Select the checkbox of the event type which includes General ,
Motion (motion detect, video loss, tempering, diagnosis),
Alarm (IoT alarms, local alarms, alarms from alarm box, IPC
external alarms, IPC Oine alarms), M&A, Intelligent (IVS
events, face detection), and POS.
Period
Dene a period during which the congured recording setting
is active.
The system only activates the alarm in the dened period.
Copy Click Copy to to copy the settings to other channels.
Step 3 Dene the video recording period by drawing or editing. By default, it is active all the
time.
●
Dene the period by drawing.
1. Select the checkbox of event type.
Figure 5-27 Event type
2. Dene a period. The system supports maximum six periods.
3. On the timeline, drag to dene a period. The Device starts recoding the selected event
type in the dened period.
User's Manual
71
Figure 5-28 Timeline
The color bar indicates the event type that is eective in a dened period:
●
Recording priority in case of event types are overlapped: M&A > Alarm >
Intelligent > Motion > General.
●
Select the checkbox of event type, and then click
to clear the dened period.
●
When selecting MD&Alarm, the MD and Alarm checkboxes will be cleared
respectively.
●
Dene the period by editing. Take Sunday as an example.
1. Click
.
User's Manual
72
Figure 5-29 Period
2. Enter the time frame for the period and select the event checkbox.
3. Click OK to save the settings.
Step 4 Click OK to complete the settings.
●
Click Copy to copy the settings to other channels.
●
After conguring the recording schedule settings, you need to perform the following
operations to start recording according to the dened schedule.
Enable the alarm event and congure the settings for the recording channel. For
details, see "5.10 Alarm Events Settings".
You need to enable the recording function, see "5.9.1 Enabling Record Control".
5.1.4.10 Conguring Snapshot Storage Schedule
Background Information
You can congure the storage schedule for the snapshot such as channels to take snapshot, alarm
settings, and the armed period.
You can also congure snapshot storage settings by selecting Main Menu > STORAGE >
Schedule > Snapshot.
Procedure
Step 1 After you have congured the video recording settings, on the Record page, click Next.
User's Manual
73
Figure 5-30 Snapshot
Step 2 Congure the snapshot settings parameters.
Table 5-10 Snapshot settings
Parameter Description
Channel In the Channel list, select a channel to take a snapshot.
Event type
Select the checkbox of the event type which includes General ,
Motion, Alarm, M&A, Intelligent, and POS.
Period
Dene a period during which the congured snapshot setting
is active. For details about dening a period, see "5.1.4.9
Conguring Recorded Video Storage Schedule".
Copy Click Copy to copy the settings to other channels.
Step 3 Click OK.
Step 4 Click OK.
The live view screen is displayed. The setting up with startup wizard is completed. You
can start using the Device.
Step 5 (Optional) After the setting with startup wizard is completed, if the connected HDMI
display resolution is inconsistent with default resolution (1280 × 1024), a dialog box will
pop up. Choose to switch the resolution or not.
User's Manual
74
Figure 5-31 Change resolution
5.2 Live View
After you logged in the Device, the live view is displayed. The number of channels displayed
depends on your model.
To enter the live view screen from other pages, click
on the upper-right corner of the screen.
Figure 5-32 Live view
User's Manual
75
5.2.1 Live View Screen
You can view the live video from the connected cameras through each channel on the screen.
●
By default, the system time, channel name and channel number are displayed on each channel
window. This setting can be congured by selecting Main Menu > CAMERA > Overlay >
Overlay.
●
The gure in the bottom right corner represents channel number. If the channel position is
changed or the channel name is modied, you can recognize the channel number by this gure
and then perform the operations such as record query and playback.
Table 5-11 Live view description
Icon Function
Indicates recording status. This icon displays when the video is being
recorded.
This icon displays when the motion detection occurs in the scene.
This icon displays when the video loss is detected.
This icon displays when the channel monitoring is locked.
To switch the position of two channels, point to one of the two channels, and then drag the
window to the other channel.
5.2.2 Live View Control bar
The live view control bar provides you access to perform the operations such as playback, zoom,
real-time backup, manual snapshot, voice talk, adding remote devices, and streams switch.
When you move the pointer to the top middle position of a channel window, the live view control
bar is displayed.
If there is not operation for six seconds after the control bar is displayed, the control bar hides
automatically.
User's Manual
76
Figure 5-33 Analog channel
Figure 5-34 Digital channel
Table 5-12 Control bar description
No. Function No. Function No. Function
1
Instant
Playback
4
Manual
Snapshot
7
Camera
Registration
2 Digital Zoom 5 Mute — —
3 Instant Record 6 Audio Talk — —
User's Manual
77
5.2.2.1 Instant Playback
You can play back the previous 5 seconds to 60 minutes of the recorded video.
By clicking
, the instant playback page is displayed. The instant playback has the following
features:
●
Move the slider to choose the time you want to start playing.
●
Play, pause and close playback.
●
The information such as channel name and recording status icon are shielded during instant
playback and will not display until exited.
●
During playback, screen split layout switch is not allowed.
●
To change the playback time, select Main Menu > SYSTEM > General > Basic, in the Instant
Play box, enter the time you want to play back.
Figure 5-35 General
5.2.2.2 Digital Zoom
You can enlarge a specic area of the image to view the details by either of the following two ways.
●
Click
, the icon switches to . Press and hold the left mouse button to select the area you
want to enlarge. The area is enlarged after the left mouse button is released.
●
Point to the center that you want to enlarge, rotate the wheel button to enlarge the area.
User's Manual
78
●
For some models, when the image is enlarged in the rst way described previously, the selected
area is zoomed proportionally according to the window.
●
When the image is in the enlarged status, you can drag the image toward any direction to view
the other enlarged areas.
●
Right-click on the enlarged image to return the original status.
5.2.2.3 Instant Record
You can record the video of any channel and save the clip into a USB storage device.
By clicking
, the recording is started. To stop recording, click this icon again. The clip is
automatically saved into the connected USB storage device.
5.2.2.4 Manual Snapshot
You can take one to ve snapshots of the video and save into a USB storage device.
By clicking
, you can take snapshots. The snapshots are automatically saved into the connected
USB storage device. You can view the snapshots on your PC.
To change the quantity of snapshots, select Main Menu > CAMERA > ENCODE > Snapshot, in the
Manual Snap list, select the snapshot quantity.
5.2.2.5 Mute (Analog channel only)
You can mute the video sound by clicking
. This function is supported in single-channel view.
5.2.2.6 Warning Light (Supported on Camera with Warning Light Function)
Click
to manually control the camera to turn on the warning light function.
5.2.2.7 Siren (Supported on Camera with Siren Function)
Click
to manually control the camera to generate alarm sound.
5.2.2.8 Two-way Talk (Digital channel Only)
You can perform the voice interaction between the Device and the remote device to improve
eciency of emergency. This function is supported only when the remotely connected IPC device
supports bidirectional talk.
●
Click
, the icon switches to , the bidirectional talk of the remote device is turned on. The
bidirectional talk of other digital channels is disabled.
●
Click
to cancel the bidirectional talk. The bidirectional talk of other digital channels is
resumed.
User's Manual
79
5.2.2.9 Adding Camera (Digital channel Only)
You can view the information of remote devices and add new remote devices to replace the current
connected devices.
By clicking
, the Camera List page is displayed. For details about adding the remote devices,
see ."5.6 Conguring Remote Devices".
5.2.3 Navigation Bar
You can access the functions to perform operations through the function icons on the navigation
bar. For example, you can access Main Menu and switch window split mode.
The navigation bar is disabled by default. It does not appear in the live view screen until it is
enabled. To enable it, select Main Menu > SYSTEM > General > Basic, enable the Navigation Bar,
and then click Apply.
Figure 5-36 Navigation bar
Table 5-13 Navigation bar description
Icon Function
Open Main Menu.
Expand or condense the navigation bar.
Select view layout.
Go to the previous screen.
Go to the next screen.
Enable tour function. The icon switches to .
Open the PTZ control panel. For details, see "5.4 Controlling PTZ
Cameras".
Open the Image page.
This function is supported only in single-channel layout.
Open the record search page. For detail, see "5.9 Playing Back
Video"
Open the Alarm Status page to view the device alarm status.
Open the CHANNEL INFO page to display the information of
each channel.
Open the Camera List page. For details, see "5.6.1 Adding
Remote Devices".
User's Manual
80
Icon Function
Open the Network page. For details, see "5.15.1 Conguring
Network Settings".
Open the Disk Manager page. For details, see "5.18.3
Conguring Disk Manager".
Open the USB Management page. For details about USB
operations, see "5.14.2 Backing up Files", "5.21.3 Viewing Event
Information", "5.20.4 Exporting and Importing System Settings",
and "5.20.6 Updating the Device".
5.2.4 Shortcut Menu
You can quickly access some function pages such as main menu, record search, PTZ setting, color
setting and select the view split mode.
Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed.
After you access any page through shortcut menu, you can return to the previous screen by right-
clicking on the current screen.
User's Manual
81
Figure 5-37 Shortcut menu
Table 5-14 Menu parameters
Function Description
Main Menu Open Main Menu page.
Search
Open the PLAYBACK page where you can search and play back
record les.
PTZ Open the PTZ page.
View Layout
Congure the live view screen as a single-channel layout or
multi-channel layout.
Previous Screen Click Previous Screen to go to the previous screen. For example,
if you are using 4-split mode, the rst screen is displaying the
channel 1-4, click Next screen, you can view channel 5-8.
Next Screen
Add Camera
Open the Camera List page. For details, see "5.6 Conguring
Remote Devices".
User's Manual
82
Function Description
This parameter displays on the right-click menu only after setting
at least one channel to IP type in Main Menu > CAMERA >
Channel Type.
Manual Control
●
Select Record Mode , you can congure the recording mode
as Auto or Manual, or stop the recording. You can also
enable or disable snapshot function
●
Select Alarm Mode, you can congure alarm output settings.
Live Mode
●
Select General, the layout of live view screen is as default.
●
Select Face, the detected face snapshots are displayed in the
bottom of the live view screen.
Auto Focus
Point to the channel window and right-click on it to open the
shortcut menu, and then click Auto Focus.
Not all cameras support this function.
Image
Open the Image page where you can adjust the video image
color.
Camera Property Click to modify the camera properties.
Sub Port Click to switch to extra screen control.
5.2.5 AI Preview Mode
You can view the detected faces snapshots and comparison results of detected faces and the faces
in the database, and play back the recorded picture le.
To display the AI preview mode, the face detection function must be enabled. For details, see
"5.11.2.1 Face Detection".
Right-click on the live view screen to display the shortcut menu, and then select Live Mode > AI
Mode, the AI preview mode page is displayed.
User's Manual
83
Figure 5-38 Live view
●
: Indicates the quantity of detected faces from 0 A.M. to midnight.
●
: Indicates the quantity of detected humans 0 A.M. to midnight.
●
: Indicates the quantity of detected motor vehicles 0 A.M. to midnight.
●
: Indicates the quantity of detected non-motor vehicles 0 A.M. to midnight.
●
: Click this icon and then select the face attributes that you want to display on the AI preview
mode. Maximum four attributes are supported to display.
●
: Click this icon to export counting report in .csv format. The report information includes
date, starting time, ending time, and the number of human, vehicle and face. The title of report
is named as "device name_ XVR_AI_Statistics_starting time_ending time.csv".
User's Manual
84
Figure 5-39 Properties
5.2.6 Channel Sequence
Background Information
You can adjust the channel sequence displayed on live page on actual needs.
The live view page displays the default channel sequence after restoring factory defaults.
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click on the live view page and select Sequence.
●
The system displays the maximum number of window splits supported by the DVR
after selecting Sequence.
●
The Sequence page displays only the channel name and channel number of added
remote devices.
represents the remote device is online, and represents the
remote device is oine.
User's Manual
85
Figure 5-40 Sequence
Step 2 Adjust channel sequence.
●
Drag a channel to the target window split.
●
Drag a window split to another to change the sequence.
You can view the channel sequence according to the channel number on the lower-right
corner of the window split.
User's Manual
86
Figure 5-41 Adjusted sequence
5.2.7 Color Setting
You can adjust the video image color eect such as sharpness, brightness, and contrast. The
parameters are dierent according to the connected camera type. Take analog channel as an
example.
Parameters displayed on the page vary from dierent cameras.
In the live view screen, right-click on the analog channel to see the shortcut menu, and then select
Image , the Image page is displayed.
User's Manual
87
Figure 5-42 Image
Table 5-15 Image settings
Parameter Description
Period
Divide 24 hours into two periods and congure the corresponding
color settings.
Eective Time Enable the function and then set the eective time for each period.
Sharpness
Adjust the sharpness of image edge. The bigger the value is, the
more obvious the image edge, and the noise is also greater.
The value ranges from 1 to 15. The default value is 1.
Hue
Adjust the hue of image. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The
default value is 50.
Brightness
Adjust the image brightness. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The
default value is 50.
The bigger the value is, the brighter the image will become. You
can adjust this value when the image as a whole looks dark or
bright. However, the image is likely to become dim if the value is
too big.
User's Manual
88
Parameter Description
The recommended range is between 40 and 60.
Contrast
Adjust the image contrast. The bigger the value is, the more
obvious the contrast between the light area and dark area will
become. You can adjust this value when the contrast is not
obvious. However, if the value is too big, the dark area is likely to
become darker and the light area over exposed. If the value is too
small, the image is likely to become dim.
The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The
recommended range is between 40 and 60.
Saturation
Adjust the color shades. The bigger the value, the lighter the color
will become. This value does not inuence the general image
lightness.
The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The
recommended range is between 40 and 60.
Color Mode
In the Color Mode list, you can select Standard, Soft, Bright, Vivid,
Bank, Customized 1, Customized 2, Customized 3, and Customized
4.
The sharpness, hue, brightness, contrast and saturation will adjust
automatically according to the selected color mode.
EQ
Enhance the image eect. Adjust the eect value.
●
Click
, image is adjusted to the optimized eect
automatically.
●
Click
, the current eect setting will be locked.
Only HD analog channel supports this function.
Position
Adjust the display position of the image in the channel window.
The value indicates pixel. The default value is 16.
This function is only supported by analog channel.
Custom
You can customize four color modes.
1. Click Custom . The Custom Color page is displayed.
2. In the Color Mode list, select Custom 1, for example. Then
congure the settings for sharpness, hue, brightness, contrast
and saturation. If you select All, the conguration will apply to
all four customized color modes.
3. Click OK.
4. On the Image page, in the Color Mode list, you can select the
customized color mode.
User's Manual
89
5.2.8 Live View Display
5.2.8.1 Conguring Display Settings
Background Information
You can congure the display eect such as displaying time title and channel title, adjusting image
transparency, and selecting the resolution.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > DISPLAY > Display.
Figure 5-43 Display
Step 2 Congure the settings for the display parameters.
Table 5-16 Display parameters
Parameter Description
Main Screen Output Port Indicates the main screen port.
User's Manual
90
Parameter Description
Time Title
Select the Time Title checkbox, the current
system time displays in each channel window
in live view screen. To hide the time, clear the
checkbox.
Channel Title
Select the Channel Title checkbox, the
channel name, channel number and
recording status display in each channel
window in live view screen. To hide the time,
clear the checkbox.
Original Ratio
Select the Original Ratio checkbox, the
video image displays in its actual size in the
channel window.
View Setting
Click SETTING to enable AI rule, bounding
box of IVS target and SMD rule on the live
page.
Live Audio
Select the Live Audio checkbox to enable
the audio adjustment function in the channel
window on the live view screen.
Move the slider to adjust the volume of live
audio.
Volume
Transparency
Congure the transparency of the graphical
user interface (GUI). The higher the value, the
more transparent the GUI becomes.
Resolution
Select resolution for the video. The default
resolution for VGA port and HDMI port is
1280 × 1024.
Some of the resolution options might not be
supported on the HDMI port.
Live Mode
●
General: No information is displayed on
the channel window.
●
AI Mode: Displays the detected face
snapshots.
This function is available on select models.
Sub Screen
Enable
Enable extra screen function. After this
function is enabled, you can select which port
as extra screen port, and the other port
automatically becomes the main screen port.
Output Port
Select the VGA port or HDMI port as the port
connected by a secondary monitor. For
example, if you select HDMI port as the extra
screen port, the VGA port automatically
becomes the main screen port.
User's Manual
91
Parameter Description
Resolution
Select resolution for the video. The default
resolution for VGA port and HDMI port is
1280 × 720.
Some of the resolution options might not be
supported on the HDMI port.
Show Message
After it is enabled, the sub screen will display
alarm message when an alarm is triggered.
●
The main menu does not display on the extra screen.
●
If you do not enable the extra screen function, both the VGA port and HDMI port display the
same image.
5.2.8.2 Conguring Zero-Channel Settings
You can view several video sources on one channel on the web end.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > DISPLAY > Zero-Channel.
Figure 5-44 Zero-channel
Step 2 Congure the settings for the zero-channel parameters.
Table 5-17 Zero-channel parameters
Parameter Description
Enable Enable zero-channel function.
Compression
In the Compression list, select the video compression standard
according to the device capability. The default is H.265.
User's Manual
92
Parameter Description
Resolution
In the Resolution list, select the video resolution. The default is
704 × 576 (D1).
Frame Rate (FPS)
Select a value between 1 and 25 for PAL standard, and between
1 and 30 for NTSC standard. The actual arrange is decided and
selected dependent on the Device capability.
Bit Rate (Kb/S)
The default value is 1024Kb/S. The actual arrange is decided and
selected dependent on the Device capability and frame rate.
Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.
In the live page on the web, click
to select one of the
multi-channel modes, and then you can view the local video image.
5.2.8.3 Conguring TV
You can adjust the border margins in top, bottom, left and right directions as well as the brightness
of the monitor connected to the Video out port of the Device.
This function is available on select models.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > DISPLAY > TV Adjust.
Figure 5-45 TV adjust
Step 2 Congure the parameters according to your actual situation.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.2.9 Conguring Tour Settings
Background Information
You can congure a tour of selected channels to repeat playing videos. The videos display in turn
according to the channel group congured in tour settings. The system displays one channel group
for a certain period and then automatically changes to the next channel group.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > DISPLAY > Tour Setting.
User's Manual
93
Figure 5-46 Main screen
User's Manual
94
Figure 5-47 Sub screen
Step 2 Congure the settings for the tour parameters for both Main Screen and Sub Screen.
Table 5-18 Tour parameters
Parameter Description
Enable Enable tour function.
Interval (Sec.)
Enter the amount of time that you want each channel group displays on
the screen. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 120 seconds, and the
default value is 5 seconds.
Motion Tour, Alarm
Tour
Select the View 1 or View 8 for Motion Tour and Alarm Tour (system
alarm events).
Live Layout
In the Live Layout list, select View 1, View 4, View 8, or other modes
that are supported by the Device.
Channel Group
Display all channel groups under the current Window Split setting.
●
Add a channel group: Click Add , in the pop-up Add Group channel,
select the channels to form a group, and then click Save.
●
Delete a channel group: Select the checkbox of any channel group,
and then click Delete.
●
Edit a channel group: Select the checkbox of any channel group and
then click Modify , or double-click on the group. The Modify Channel
Group dialog box is displayed. You can regroup the channels.
●
Click Move up or Move down to adjust the position of channel
group.
User's Manual
95
Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.
●
On the upper-right corner of the live view screen, use the left mouse button or press
Shift to switch between
(image switching is allowed) and (image switching is not
allowed) to turn on/o the tour function.
●
On the navigation bar, click
to enable the tour and click to disable it.
Related Operations
●
Add a channel group.
1. Click Add.
2. Select the channels that you want to group for tour.
If you want to select more than one channel, in the Live Layout list, do not select View 1.
3. Click OK.
●
Modify a channel group.
Double-click on a channel group, the Channel Group Modied page is displayed. You can
modify channel group and click OK to complete the settings.
5.2.10 Quick Operation Bar
You can quickly access to the function modules on function tiles and setting menu through
shortcut icons on quick operation bar.
This topic uses ALARM and CAMERA an examples to show you how to quickly access to other
modules.
Shortcut Icons on Function Titles
Click ALARM to enter the ALARM page.
User's Manual
96
Figure 5-48 Alarm
Table 5-19 Alarm parameters
Icon Description
Click to go to Search page.
Click to go to Alarm page.
Click to go to AI page.
Click to go to POS page.
Click to go to Network page.
Click to go to Maintain page.
Click to go to Backup page.
Click to go to Display page.
Click to go to Audio page.
Shortcut Icons on Setting Menu
Click CAMERA to enter the CAMERA page.
User's Manual
97
Figure 5-49 Camera
Table 5-20 Camera parameters
Icon Description
Click to go to Camera page.
Click to go to Network page.
Click to go to Storage page.
Click to go to System page.
Click to go to Security page.
Click to go to Account page.
5.3 Entering Main Menu
Right-click on the live view screen, and then the shortcut menu is displayed. Click Main Menu and
then log in to the system.
User's Manual
98
Figure 5-50 Main menu
Table 5-21 Main menu description
No. Icon Description
1 Function tiles
Includes nine function tiles: SEARCH , ALARM,
SMART DETECTION, POS, IoT, MAINTAIN,
BACKUP, DISPLAY and AUDIO. Click each tile to
open the conguration page of the tile.
●
SEARCH : Search for and play back the
recorded video saved on the Device.
●
ALARM : Search for alarm information and
congure alarm event actions.
●
SMART DETECTION : Search SMD, face
detection, and IVS information, and congure
related settings.
●
POS : You can connect the Device to the POS
(Point of Sale) machine and receive the
information from it.
●
IoT: IoT live video preview, search, export
reports, and congure function settings.
●
MAINTAIN : You can view log and system
information, test network and do other
maintenance work.
User's Manual
99
No. Icon Description
●
BACKUP : Search and back up the video les
to the external storage device such as USB
storage device.
●
DISPLAY : Congure the display eect such as
displaying content, image transparency, and
resolution, and enable the zero-channel
function.
●
AUDIO : Manage audio les and congure the
playing schedule. The audio le can be played
in response to an alarm event if the voice
prompts function is enabled.
2 Switch icon
indicates the current page of main menu.
Click
to switch to the next page or click or
to turn page.
3 Setting menu
Includes six congurations through which you
can congure camera settings, network settings,
storage settings, system settings, account
settings, and view information.
4 Live
Click
to go to the live view screen.
5
When you point to , the current user account is
displayed.
6
Click , select Logout , Reboot, or Shutdown
according to your actual situation.
7
Displays Mobile Client and Device SN QR Code.
●
Mobile Client: Use your mobile phone to scan
the QR code to add the device into the Cell
Phone Client, and then you can start accessing
the Device from your cell phone.
●
Device SN: Obtain the Device SN by scanning
the QR code. Go to the P2P management
platform and add the Device SN into the
platform. Then you can access and manage
the device in the WAN. For details, refer to the
P2P operation manual. You can also congure
P2P function in the local congurations.
5.4 Controlling PTZ Cameras
PTZ is a mechanical platform that carries a camera and a protective cover and performs overall
control remotely. A PTZ can move in both horizontal and vertical direction to provide all-around
view to the camera.
Before operating PTZ, ensure the network connection between PTZ and the Device.
User's Manual
100
5.4.1 Conguring PTZ Connection Settings
Background Information
You need to congure the PTZ connection settings before use.
●
Local connection: RS-485 Port for connecting speed dome or coaxial cable for connecting
coaxial camera.
●
Remote connection: local area network.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERAPTZ.
Figure 5-51 PTZ
Step 2 Congure the settings for the PTZ connection parameters.
Table 5-22 PTZ connection parameters
Parameter Description
Channel
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to connect the PTZ
camera to.
Type
●
Local: Connect through RS-485 port or coaxial cable.
●
Remote: Connect through network by adding IP address of PTZ
camera to the Device.
User's Manual
101
Parameter Description
Control Mode
In the Control Mode list, select Serial Port or HDCVI. For HDCVI series
product, select HDCVI. The control signal is sent to the PTZ through the
coaxial cable. For the serial mode, the control signal is sent to the PTZ
through the RS-485 port.
Protocol
In the Protocol list, select the protocol for the PTZ camera. For example,
select HDCVI3.0.
Address
In the Address box, enter the address for PTZ camera. The default is 1.
The entered address must be the same with the address congured on
the PTZ camera; otherwise the PTZ camera cannot be controlled from
the Device.
Baud Rate
In the Baud Rate list, select the baud rate for the PTZ camera. The
default is 9600.
Data Bits The default value is 8.
Stop Bits The default value is 1.
Parity The default value is NONE.
Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.
Click Copy to copy the settings to other channels.
5.4.2 Working with PTZ Control Panel
PTZ control panel performs the operations such as directing camera in eight directions, adjusting
zoom, focus and iris settings, and quick positioning.
Basic PTZ Control Panel
Right-click on the live view screen and then select PTZ. The PTZ control panel is displayed.
Figure 5-52 PTZ control panel
The functions with buttons in gray are not supported by the system.
User's Manual
102
Table 5-23 PTZ control panel description
Parameter Description
Speed
Controls the movement speed. The bigger the value is, the
faster the movement will be.
Zoom
: Zoom out.
: Zoom in.
Focus
: Focus far.
: Focus near.
Iris
: Image darker.
: Image brighter.
PTZ movement Supports eight directions.
Fast positioning button.
●
Positioning: Click
to enter the fast positioning screen,
and then click anywhere on the live view screen, the PTZ
will turn to this point and move it to the middle of the
screen.
●
Zooming: On the fast positioning screen, drag to draw a
square on the view. The square supports zooming.
Dragging upward is to zoom out, and dragging
downward is to zoom in.
The smaller the square, the larger the zoom eect.
This function is available on select models and can only be
controlled through mouse operations.
Click , you can control the four directions (left, right, up,
and down) PTZ movement through mouse operation.
Click to open the expanded PTZ control panel.
Expanded PTZ Control Panel
On the basic PTZ control panel, click
to open the expanded PTZ control panel to nd more
options.
User's Manual
103
Figure 5-53 Expanded PTZ control panel
●
The functions with buttons in gray are not supported by the system.
●
Right-click to return to the page of PTZ basic control panel.
Table 5-24 Expanded PTZ control panel description
Icon Function
Preset
Tour
Pattern
Scan
Auxiliary
Pan
Flip
Reset
Click the Auxiliary Cong icon to open the PTZ
functions settings page.
Click the Enter Menu icon to open the MENU
OPERATION page.
5.4.3 Conguring PTZ Functions
5.4.3.1 Conguring Presets
Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .
User's Manual
104
Figure 5-54 Preset
Step 2 Click the direction arrows to the required position.
Step 3 In the Preset box, enter the value to represent the required position.
Step 4 Click Setting to complete the preset settings.
5.4.3.2 Conguring Tours
Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .
Step 2 Click the Tour tab.
Figure 5-55 Tour
User's Manual
105
Step 3 In the Tour No. box, enter the value for the tour route.
Step 4 In the Preset box, enter the preset value.
Step 5 Click Add Preset.
Step 6 A preset will be added for this tour.
●
You can repeat adding more presets.
●
Click Delete Preset to delete the preset for this tour. This operation can be repeated
to delete more presets. Some protocols do not support deleting.
5.4.3.3 Conguring Patterns
Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .
Step 2 Click the Pattern tab.
Figure 5-56 Pattern
Step 3 In the Pattern box, enter the value for pattern.
Step 4 Click Start to perform the directions operations. You can also go to the PTZ Control Panel
to perform the operations of adjusting zoom, focus, iris, and directions.
Step 5 On the PTZ page, click End to complete the settings.
5.4.3.4 Conguring Scan
Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .
Step 2 Click the Scan tab.
User's Manual
106
Figure 5-57 Scan
Step 3 Click the direction arrows to position the left and right limits.
5.4.4 Calling PTZ Functions
After you have congured the PTZ settings, you can call the PTZ functions for monitoring from the
expanded PTZ control panel.
Figure 5-58 Expanded PTZ control panel
5.4.4.1 Calling Presets
Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ Control Panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the preset that you
want to call.
Step 2 Click to call the preset.
Step 3 Click again to stop calling the preset.
User's Manual
107
5.4.4.2 Calling Tours
Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the tour that you
want to call.
Step 2 Click to call the tour.
Step 3 Click again to stop calling the tour.
5.4.4.3 Calling Patterns
Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the pattern that
you want to call.
Step 2 Call to call the pattern.
Step 3 The PTZ camera moves according to the congured pattern repeatedly.
Step 4 Click again to stop calling the pattern.
5.4.4.4 Calling Auto Scan
Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the border that
you want to call.
Step 2 Click .
Step 3 The PTZ camera performs scanning according to the congured borders.
Step 4 Click again to stop auto scanning.
5.4.4.5 Calling Auto Pan
Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click to start moving in horizontal direction.
Step 2 Click again to stop moving.
5.4.4.6 Using AUX Button
On the expanded PTZ control panel, click
.
●
In the Shortcut Aux list, select the option that corresponds to the applied protocol.
●
In the Aux No. box, enter the number that corresponds to the AUX switch on the decoder.
User's Manual
108
Figure 5-59 Auxiliary
5.4.5 Calling OSD Menu
Background Information
For the coaxial camera, you can call the OSD menu through the expanded PTZ control panel.
Procedure
Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .
Figure 5-60 PTZ menu
Step 2 Click Enter.
User's Manual
109
Figure 5-61 OSD
Step 3 On the PTZ Menu page, click the arrow button to select the onscreen parameters.
Step 4 Click Enter to complete the settings.
5.5 Conguring Camera Settings
5.5.1 Conguring Image Settings
Background Information
You can congure the image settings such as saturation, contrast, brightness, sharpness for each
connected camera.
5.5.1.1 General Image Settings
In general, you can follow steps below to complete the image settings.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Image.
User's Manual
110
Figure 5-62 Analog channel
User's Manual
111
Figure 5-63 Digital channel
Step 2 Congure the settings for the image parameters.
On the digital channel page, click More to display more parameters.
Table 5-25 Image settings
Parameter Description
Channel In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to congure.
Cable Type
In the Cable Type list, select the cable type that the camera uses.
This function is available on select models.
Period
In the Period list, select a time period for the image settings. The
image settings will be only used during the selected period.
Eective Time
Enable the eective function.
In the Eective Time box, enter the start time and end time for the
period you selected.
Saturation
Adjusts the color shades. The bigger the value, the lighter the color will
become. This value does not inuence the general image lightness.
User's Manual
112
Parameter Description
The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The
recommended range is between 40 and 60.
Contrast
Adjusts the image contrast. The bigger the value is, the more obvious
the contrast between the light area and dark area will become. You can
adjust this value when the contrast is not obvious. However, if the
value is too big, the dark area is likely to become darker and the light
area over exposed. If the value is too small, the image is likely to
become dim.
The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The
recommended range is between 40 and 60.
Brightness
Adjusts the image brightness. The bigger the value is, the brighter the
image will become. You can adjust this value when the image as a
whole looks dark or bright. However, the image is likely to become dim
if the value is too big.
The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The
recommended range is between 40 and 60.
Hue
Adjusts the hue of image. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default
value is 50.
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of image edge. The bigger the value is, the more
obvious the image edge, and the noise is also greater.
The value ranges from 1 to 15. The default value is 1.
Image Enhance
Adjusts the image denition. The bigger the value is, the clearer the
image will become, but there will be more noises.
NR
Reduces the noises from image. The bigger the value is, the better the
image will become.
Cong File
In the Cong File list, select Day, Night, Normal, or Switch By Period.
The system congures the parameters correspondingly.
●
Day: Apply the conguration during daytime.
●
Night: Apply the conguration during nighttime.
●
Normal: Apply the conguration during day and night.
●
Switch by Period: If you select this option, you need to congure the
sunrise time and sunset time where you are located.
Mirror
Enable the function, the left and right side of the video image will be
switched. It is disabled by default.
3D Denoise
This function specially applies to the image which frame rate is
congured as 2 at least. It reduces the noises by making use of the
information between two frames. The bigger the value is, the better
the eect.
Flip
●
In the Flip list, you can select 180° to change the video image
display.
●
By default, the setting is No Flip.
User's Manual
113
Parameter Description
Light
In the Light list, select Close or Enable to use the backlight
compensation or not.
Scene Mode
Congure the white balance to adjust the general hue of the image.
The default setting is Auto.
●
Auto: Automatically apply white balance to dierent colors to make
the image color display normally.
●
Sunny: Apply the threshold value to sunny environment.
●
Night: Apply the threshold value to night.
●
Customized: Manually adjust the Red Gain and Blue Gain values.
Day & Night
Congure the color and black&white mode of the image. This setting is
not aected by the conguration les. The default setting is Auto.
●
Color: The camera outputs color image only.
●
Auto: Depends on the camera, such as overall brightness and
whether there is an IR light, either color image or black&white
image is output.
●
B/W: The camera outputs Black and white image only.
●
By Time: The camera outputs image according to the congured
sunrise time and sunset time.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.5.1.2 Illuminator Supported Image Settings
When the camera supports lights switching, you can congure illuminators to complete the image
settings.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Image
User's Manual
114
Figure 5-64 Illuminator Supported Analog Channel
Step 2 Congure the illuminator as you need.
On the analog page, you can select illuminator, and then select mode.
Table 5-26 Illuminator
Parameters Description
White Light
Select one of three modes.
●
Auto: Turn on the white light and adjust automatically.
●
Manual: Manually turn on the white light.
●
O: Turn o the white light.
IR Mode
Select one of three modes.
●
Auto: Turn on the infrared light and adjust automatically.
●
Manual: Manually turn on the infrared light.
●
O: Turn o the infrared light.
Smart Illuminator
Switch automatically between the white light and the infrared
light.
Illuminator Scheduled Plan
Congure time periods by selecting white light, IR mode, and
smart illuminator as you need, represented by yellow, orange,
and blue respectively. The default is smart illuminator for all time
periods.
User's Manual
115
Parameters Description
●
Select one mode for the same time period.
●
Set modes of up to 6 dierent time periods
In the illuminator scheduled plan, when XVR is started and the
camera is recognized, it is necessary to reset the mode of the
camera based on the current system time and the planned mode.
White light, IR mode, and smart illuminator are congured for the camera, and the
illuminator scheduled plan is congured for XVR.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.5.2 Conguring Encode Settings
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode > Audio/Video.
Figure 5-65 Audio/video
Step 2 Congure the settings for the main/sub streams parameters.
User's Manual
116
Table 5-27 Main/sub stream parameters
Parameter Description
Channel
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to
congure the settings for.
Coding Strategy
●
General: Uses general coding strategy.
●
Smart Codec: Enables the smart codec function. This function
can reduce the video bit stream for non-important recorded
video to maximize the storage space.
●
AI Codec: Enables the AI codec function. This function can
reduce the video bit stream for non-important recorded
video to maximize the storage space.
Type
●
Main Stream: In the Type list, select General, Motion, or
Alarm.
●
Sub Stream: This setting is not congurable.
Compression
In the Compression list, select the encode mode.
●
H.265: Main prole encoding. This setting is recommended.
●
H.264H: High prole encoding. Low bit stream with high
denition.
●
H.264: General prole encoding.
●
H.264B: Baseline prole encoding. This setting requires
higher bit stream compared with other settings for the same
denition.
Resolution
In the Resolution list, select resolution for the video.
The maximum video resolution might be dierent dependent on
your device model.
Frame Rate (FPS)
Congure the frames per second for the video. The higher the
value, the clearer and smoother the image will become. Frame
rate changes along with the resolution.
Generally, in PAL format, you can select the value from 1 through
25; in NTSC format, you can select the value from 1 through 30.
However, the specic range of frame rate that you can select
depends on the capability of the Device.
Quality
This function is available if you select VBR in the Bit Rate List.
The higher the value, the better the image will become.
I Frame Interval The interval between two reference frames.
Bit Rate (Kb/S)
In the Bit Rate list, select a value or enter a customized value to
change the image quality. The bigger the value is, the better the
image will become.
Video Enable the function for sub stream.
Audio
Click More , the More page is displayed.
Audio Source
User's Manual
117
Parameter Description
Compression
●
Audio: This function is enabled by default for main stream.
You need to manually enable it for sub stream 1. Once this
function is enabled, the recorded video le is composite
audio and video stream.
●
Audio Source: In the Audio Source list, you can select
LOCAL and HDCVI.
●
Audio Format: In the Compression list, select a format that
you need.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
Click Copy to to copy the settings to other channels.
5.5.3 Conguring Snapshot Settings
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode > Snapshot.
Figure 5-66 Snapshot
Step 2 Congure the settings for the snapshot parameters.
User's Manual
118
Table 5-28 Snapshot parameters
Parameter Description
Manual Snapshot
In the Manual Snapshot list, select how many snapshots you want
to take each time.
Channel
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to congure
the settings for.
Type
In the Type list, you can select Scheduled Event, or Face
Snapshot as the event type for which you want to take a snapshot.
●
Scheduled : The snapshot is taken during the scheduled period.
●
Event : The snapshot is taken when there is an alarm event
occurs, such as motion detection event, video loss, and local
alarms.
●
Face Snapshot: The snapshot is taken when the face is
detected. The face detection function is support only with the
Channel 1.
Size
In the Size list, select a value for the image. The bigger the value is,
the better the image will become.
Quality
Congures the image quality by 6 levels. The higher the level, the
better the image will become.
Interval
Congures or customizes the snapshot frequency. You can select 1
second per one snapshot to 7 seconds per one snapshot. The
maximum is 3600 seconds per one snapshot.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
Click Copy to to copy the settings to other channels.
5.5.4 Conguring Encode Enhancement
You can enable this function and get more FPS in encode settings (see "5.5.2 Conguring Encode
Settings"). In the meantime, you will not be able to use extra screen function (see "5.2.8.1
Conguring Display Settings") and AI functions (see "5.11 AI Function").
Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode > Encode Enhancement.
User's Manual
119
Figure 5-67 Encode enhancement
Click the switch to enable it.
●
When connecting to the new generation 4K cameras, you can enable 4K-N to switch 4K non-
live view to 4K-N live view and encoding.
●
When connecting to the 5M cameras, you can enable Encode Enhancement to select 12.5
frame and encode resolution of 5MP.
The number of channels that XVR supports 5MP 12.5 frame is subject to actual measurement.
Table 5-29 Encoding Mode
Parameters Description
5M-N
Switch the camera to 5MP, 25 frame, and encode resolution of 5M-N,
with a maximum frame of 12.
5MP
Switch the camera to 5MP, 12.5 frame, and encode resolution of 5MP,
with a maximum frame of 6.
Encoding conguration automatically adapts according to the set mode.
The button of select all is displayed on the device that supports full channels, or it is hidden.
User's Manual
120
5.5.5 Conguring Overlay Settings
Background Information
You can congure to display system time and channel name on each channel window in the live
view screen.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Overlay > Overlay.
Figure 5-68 Overlay
Step 2 Congure the settings for the text overlay parameters.
Table 5-30 Overlay parameters
Parameter Description
Channel
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to
congure the settings for.
Time Title
Select the Time Title checkbox to display the system time on
each channel window in the live view screen.
In the Time Title list, select time display style.
Channel Title
Select the Channel Title checkbox to display the channel
name on each channel window in the live view screen.
User's Manual
121
Parameter Description
In the Channel Title box, enter the name for the selected
channel.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
Click Copy to to copy the settings to other channels.
5.5.6 Conguring Covered Area Settings
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Overlay > Privacy Masking.
Figure 5-69 Privacy masking
Step 2 Congure the settings for the covered area parameters.
Table 5-31 Covered area parameters
Parameter Description
Channel
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to
congure the settings for.
User's Manual
122
Parameter Description
Live
●
Preview: Select the Live checkbox to apply the
congured covered block to the selected channel
window in the live view screen.
●
Record: Select the Record checkbox to apply the
congured covered block to the selected channel
window during recording.
To congure covering block, do the following:
a. Select the Live checkbox or the Record checkbox, or
select the both. The "1, 2, 3, 4" buttons are activated.
b. Click the buttons to select blocks.
c. A triangle solid black block is displayed.
d. Drag the block to the area that you want to cover and
adjust the size of the block. You can congure total 4
covered blocks.
Record
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.5.7 Conguring Channel Type
Background Information
You can congure the channel type as Analog or IP channel.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Channel Type.
User's Manual
123
Figure 5-70 Channel type
Step 2 Congure the channels.
●
Analog Channel: Select the transmission medium such as CVI, AHD, CVBS, and then
follow the onscreen instructions to complete the settings.
●
IP Channel: You can enable the IP channels by disabling the corresponding analog
channels. The Device also provides expanded IP channels for your use, such as the 17–
64 channels in 0.
●
The 17–64 channels are only for IP camera and the range changes dependent on the
model you purchased.
●
The channel selection for analog camera or IP camera are in sequence, for example, if
you want to select channels for IP camera, you need to select from the last channel
number Channel 16 rst, which means, you cannot go to select the channel 15
directly until you have selected the channel 16.
Step 3 Click Apply and follow the onscreen instructions to complete the settings.
5.5.8 Upgrading Coaxial Camera
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > HDVCI Update.
User's Manual
124
Figure 5-71 Update
Step 2 Click Browse.
Step 3 Select the upgrade le and then click OK.
You need to insert the USB storage device that contains the upgrading les.
Step 4 Select the checkbox of the channel that you want to upgrade.
Step 5 Click Update.
Step 6 If the upgrading is successful, the system pops up a message indicating the upgrading is
completed.
5.6 Conguring Remote Devices
5.6.1 Adding Remote Devices
This function is available after you have congured the channel type as IP channel as described in
previous section, see "5.5.7 Conguring Channel Type".
You can add remote devices by adding the IP address.
Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Camera List > Add Camera.
User's Manual
125
Figure 5-72 Add camera
Table 5-32 Parameters
Parameter Description
Uninitialized
Enable the Uninitialized function, the uninitialized devices
out of the searched devices are displayed in the searched
device list.
Initialize
Select the uninitialized device from the uninitialized device list,
and the click Initialize to start initializing device.
Filter
In the Filter list, select the remote device type that you want
to display in the searched device list.
●
None: Display all types of devices.
●
IPC: Display the front-end devices.
●
DVR: Display all storage devices such as NVR, DVR and
HCVR.
●
OTHER: Display the devices that do not belong to IPC or
DVR type.
Searched Device List
Displays the searched devices. You can view the device
information such as status, IP address.
Search
Click Search, the searched devices display in the searched
device list.
User's Manual
126
Parameter Description
To adjust the display sequence, in the title line, you can click
the IP address, Type or Device Name text. For example, click
the IP address text, the sequence icon is
displayed.
"*" is displayed next to the added device.
Add
In the Searched Device List area, select the device that you
want to add.
Manual Add
Add the device by manually conguring settings such as IP
address, channel selection.
Added Device List
Displays the added devices. You can edit and delete the device,
and view the device information.
Delete
Select the checkbox of the added device, and then click
Delete to delete the added device.
Import
Select the searched devices and then click Import to import
the devices in batches.
Export
Select the added devices and then click Export. The exported
devices information is saved into the USB storage device.
5.6.1.1 Initializing Remote Devices
Background Information
You can reset the password and IP address of the remote devices through initializing.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Search Device.
The devices found are displayed in the table.
User's Manual
127
Figure 5-73 Search result
Step 2 Enable the Initialized function.
The uninitialized devices are displayed.
User's Manual
128
Figure 5-74 Uninitialized devices
Step 3 Select the uninitialized device that you want to initialize.
Step 4 Click Initialize.
User's Manual
129
Figure 5-75 Enter password
Step 5 Congure the password and email information.
If you select the Using current device password and email info checkbox, the remote
device automatically uses the current password and email information, so you do not
need to set the password and email address again and can skip this step.
1. Clear the Using current device password and email info checkbox.
User's Manual
130
Figure 5-76 Password setting
2. Congure the settings for the password setting parameters.
Table 5-33 Password parameters
Parameter Description
User The default is admin.
Password
The password must consist of 8–32 non-blank characters
and contain at least two types of the following characters:
uppercase, lowercase, numbers, and special characters
(excluding ' " ; : &).
Enter a strong password according to the password
strength bar indication.
Conrm Password
3. Click Next.
User's Manual
131
Figure 5-77 Password protection
4. Select the Email Address box and enter the email address that you want to reserve
for password reset in the future.
If you do not want to set the reserved email address, click Skip.
Step 6 Click Next.
User's Manual
132
Figure 5-78 Network
Step 7 Congure the IP address.
●
Select the DHCP checkbox, you do not need to enter the IP address information,
because the system will allocate one IP address to the remote device.
●
Select the STATIC checkbox, you need to enter the IP address, subnet mast, default
gateway, and incremental value. The system will allocate the IP address to the remote
devices by progressively increasing the last part of the IP address when initializing
devices in batches.
When conguring IP address for multiple remote devices which were not in the same
network segment, these remote devices will belong to the same network segment after
conguration.
Step 8 Click Next.
The initializing is started.
User's Manual
133
Figure 5-79 Initialization nished
Step 9 Click Finished to complete the settings.
5.6.1.2 Adding Remote Devices Automatically
Procedure
Step 1 On the Registration page, click Device Search
The devices found are displayed.
User's Manual
134
Figure 5-80 Search device
Step 2 Select the checkbox of the device.
Step 3 Click Add.
The device is added into the Added Device area.
●
You can also double-click the device to add it into the Added Device area.
●
You can add devices in batches.
5.6.1.3 Adding Remote Devices Manually
Procedure
Step 1 On the Add Camera page, click Manual Add.
User's Manual
135
Figure 5-81 Manual add
Step 2 Congure the settings for the manual adding device parameters.
Table 5-34 Manual add parameters
Parameter Description
Channel
In the Channel list, select the channel that you want use on
the Device to connect the remote device.
Manufacturer
In the Manufacturer list, select the manufacturer of the
remote device.
IP Address
In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of remote
device.
The default is 192.168.0.0 which the system cannot connect
to.
RTSP Port
The default value setting is 554. You can enter the value
according to your actual situation.
HTTP Port
The default value setting is 80. You can enter the value
according to your actual situation.
User's Manual
136
Parameter Description
If you enter other value, for example, 70, and then you
should enter 70 after the IP address when logging in the
Device by browser.
TCP Port
The default value setting is 37777. You can enter the value
according to your actual situation.
Username Enter the username of the remote device.
Password Enter the password of the user for the remote device.
Remote CH No.
Enter the remote channel number of the remote device that
you want to add.
Decoder Strategy
In the Decoder Strategy list, select Default, Realtime, or
Fluent.
Protocol Type
●
If the remote device is added through private protocol,
the default type is TCP.
●
If the remote device is added through ONVIF protocol,
the system supports Auto , TCP, UDP, or MULTICAST.
●
If the remote device is added through other
manufacturers, the system supports TCP and UDP.
Encryption
If the remote device is added through ONVIF protocol,
enabling the Encryption checkbox will provide encryption
protection to the data being transmitted.
To use this function, the HTTPS function should be enabled
for the remote IP camera.
Step 3 Click OK to save the settings.
●
Only one device can be added manually at one time.
●
indicates successful connection and indicates connection failed.
5.6.1.4 Modifying or Deleting Remote Devices
You can modify and delete the added devices.
●
Modify the remote devices
1. Click
or double-click a device.
User's Manual
137
Figure 5-82 Modify
2. In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to modify settings for.
3. Click OK to save the settings.
●
Delete the remote devices one by one or in batches
Click to delete one device.
Select the checkbox of the devices that you want to delete, and then click Delete.
5.6.1.5 Modifying IP Address
You can modify a single IP address or multiple IP addresses of remote devices at one time.
You can only modify the IP address of initialized cameras.
●
Modify a single IP address
1. In the Searched Device list area, click
for the device that you want to modify IP.
User's Manual
138
Figure 5-83 Modify IP
2. Congure the settings for IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, username, and
password.
3. Click OK to save the settings.
●
Modify IP address in batches
1. In the Searched Device list area, select the devices that you want to modify IP address in
batches.
2. Click
.
User's Manual
139
Figure 5-84 Modify IP
3. Set incremental value.
The system will add the incremental value to the fourth segment of IP addresses of selected
devices.
4. Congure the settings for start IP address (the IP address is allocated in sequence), subnet
mask, default gateway, username, and password.
5. Click OK to save the settings.
5.6.1.6 Exporting IP Address
Background Information
You can export the added IP address to the USB storage device.
The exported information is saved in .csv le, which includes IP address, port number, channel
number, manufacturer, username, and password.
Procedure
Step 1 Insert the USB storage device to the USB port of the Device.
Step 2 Click Export.
User's Manual
140
Figure 5-85 Browse
Step 3 Congure the save path.
Step 4 Click OK to save the settings.
A pop-up message indicating "Successfully exported" is displayed.
Step 5 Click OK.
When exporting IP address, the Backup Encryption checkbox is selected by default. The
le information includes IP address, port, channel number, manufacturer, username, and
password.
●
If you select the Backup Encryption checkbox, the le format is .backup.
●
If you clear the Backup Encryption checkbox, the le format is .csv. In this case, there
might be a risk of data leakage.
5.6.1.7 Importing IP Address
Background Information
You can add remote devices by importing IP address information.
Procedure
Step 1 Insert the USB storage device to the USB port of the Device.
Step 2 Click Import.
User's Manual
141
Figure 5-86 Browse
Step 3 Select the le that you want to import.
Step 4 Click OK to start importing.
Step 5 After importing is completed, a pop-up message indicating "The import succeeded" is
displayed.
If the IP address that you want to import already exists in the Device, the system will pop
up a message to ask you whether to overwrite the existing content.
●
Click OK to replace the existing one.
●
Click Cancel to add it as a separate device in the Added Device area.
●
You can edit the exported .csv le and be cautious not to change the le format;
otherwise the le cannot be imported as it will be judged as invalid.
●
The language of .csv le must match the Device language.
●
The import and export through customized protocol is not supported.
5.6.2 Managing Remote Devices
You can view the status of remote devices and upgrade.
5.6.2.1 Viewing Status
You can view the device information such as connection status, IP address, motion detection, video
loss detection, camera name, and manufacturer.
User's Manual
142
Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Camera List > Status.
5.6.2.2 Viewing Firmware Information
You can view the device rmware information such as channel number, IP address, manufacturer,
system version, video input, audio input, and alarm in.
Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Camera List > Firmware.
Figure 5-87 Firmware
5.6.2.3 Upgrading Remote Devices
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Camera List > Update.
User's Manual
143
Figure 5-88 Update
Step 2 Upgrade the device.
●
File Update
a. Insert a USB storage device containing the upgrade les into the USB port of the
Device.
b. Select the devices that you want to upgrade.
c. Click File Update.
d. Select the upgrading les and click Apply.
●
Online Update
a. Click Detect or select the checkbox the device that you want to upgrade and click
Manual Check.
The system starts detecting if there is a new version on the online server.
b. Select the checkbox of all the devices that have new version.
c. Click Online Update.
The system will pop up a message to indicate if the upgrading is successful.
You can use the Type list to lter the devices so that you can nd the devices
quickly.
User's Manual
144
5.7 Conguring Record Settings
You can record video manually or automatically and congure the recording settings to main
stream and sub stream respectively.
5.7.1 Enabling Record Control
Background Information
●
Manual recording operation requires the user have the permission to access STORAGE settings.
●
Check to ensure the HDD installed in the Device has been formatted properly.
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed. On the shortcut menu,
select Manual Control > Record Control.
Figure 5-89 Record mode
Step 2 Congure the settings for the record control parameters.
Table 5-35 Record control parameters
Parameter Description
Channel
Displays all the analog channels and the connected digital channels. You
can select a single channel or select All.
User's Manual
145
Parameter Description
Main Stream/Sub
Stream
●
Auto : Automatically record according to the record type and
recording time as congured in the recording schedule.
●
Manual : Keep general recording for 24 hours for the selected
channel.
●
Stop : Do not record.
Snapshot
Enable or disable the scheduled snapshot for the corresponding
channels.
Step 3 Click Apply.
5.7.2 Conguring Recorded Video Storage Schedule
You need to congure the storage schedule for the recorded video so that the recorded video can
be saved. For details, see "5.1.4.9 Conguring Recorded Video Storage Schedule".
5.8 Conguring Snapshot Settings
5.8.1 Conguring Snapshot Trigger
The snapshot is divided into scheduled snapshot, event triggered snapshot, and face detection
triggered snapshot. When the both are enabled, the event triggered snapshot has the priority.
●
If there is no alarm event, the system performs scheduled snapshot.
●
If there is any alarm event, the system performs event triggered snapshot.
5.8.1.1 Conguring Scheduled Snapshot
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed.
Step 2 On the shortcut menu, select Manual Control > Record Control.
Step 3 In the Snapshot area, enable the snapshot for the channels if needed.
User's Manual
146
Figure 5-90 Enable snapshot
Step 4 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode > Snapshot.
Step 5 In the Type list, select Scheduled, and then congure other parameters.
Figure 5-91 Type list
Step 6 Click Apply to save the settings.
●
If you have congured the snapshot schedule, the conguration has been completed.
●
If you have not congured the snapshot schedule, see "5.1.4.10 Conguring Snapshot
Storage Schedule".
User's Manual
147
5.8.1.2 Conguring Event Triggered Snapshot
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Snapshot > Encode.
Step 2 In the Type list, select Event, and then congure other parameters.
Figure 5-92 Event
Step 3 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Video Detection, and select the event type to congure,
for example, select the Motion Detection tab.
Figure 5-93 Motion detection
User's Manual
148
Step 4 Click Setting next to Picture Storage checkbox and select the corresponding channel.
Step 5 Click Apply.
5.8.2 Conguring Snapshot Storage Schedule
You need to congure the storage schedule for the snapshot so that the snapshot can be saved. For
details, see "5.1.4.10 Conguring Snapshot Storage Schedule".
5.8.3 Backing up Snapshots to FTP
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > FTP.
Figure 5-94 FTP
Step 2 Enable the FTP function and congure the parameters. For details, see "5.18.9 Conguring
FTP Storage Settings".
The snapshots will be uploaded to FTP for backup.
User's Manual
149
5.9 Playing Back Video
5.9.1 Enabling Record Control
Background Information
●
Manual recording operation requires the user have the permission to access STORAGE settings.
●
Check to ensure the HDD installed in the Device has been formatted properly.
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed. On the shortcut menu,
select Manual Control > Record Mode.
Figure 5-95 Record mode
Step 2 Congure the settings for the record control parameters.
Table 5-36 Record control parameters
Parameter Description
Channel
Displays all the analog channels and the connected digital
channels. You can select a single channel or select All.
Main Stream/Sub Stream
●
Auto : Automatically record according to the record type and
recording time as congured in the recording schedule.
●
Manual : Keep general recording for 24 hours for the selected
channel.
User's Manual
150
Parameter Description
●
Stop : Do not record.
Snapshot
Enable or disable the scheduled snapshot for the corresponding
channels.
5.9.2 Instant Playback
You can use the instant playback function to play back the previous 5 seconds to 60 minutes of the
recorded video in any channel. For details about instant playback function, see "5.2.2.1 Instant
Playback".
5.9.3 Video Playback
You can search for and play back the recorded video saved on the Device.
Select Main Menu > Search.
Figure 5-96 Video search
Figure 5-97 Video search description
No. Function Description
1 Display Window
Display the searched recorded video or picture. Supports
simultaneously playing in single-channel, 4-channel, 9-
channel, and 16-channel.
User's Manual
151
No. Function Description
When playing back in a single channel, click and hold to
select the area that you want to enlarge. The area is enlarged
after the left mouse button is released. To exit the enlarged
status, right-click on the image.
2
Playback Controls
Bar
Playback control buttons.
3 Time Bar
Display the type and time period of the current recorded
video.
●
In the 4-channel layout, there are four time bars are
displayed; in the other view layouts, only one time bar is
displayed.
●
Click on the colored area to start playback from a certain
time.
●
In the situation when you are conguring the settings,
rotate the wheel button on the time bar, the time bar is
zooming in from 0. In the situation when playback is
ongoing, rotate the wheel button on the time bar, the
time bar is zooming from the time point where the
playback is located.
●
Time bar colors: Green indicates general type; Red
indicates external alarm; Yellow indicates motion
detection; Blue indicates intelligent events; Purple
indicates POS events.
●
For some models, when you are clicking on the blank area
in the time bar, the system automatically jumps to the
next time point where there is a recorded video located.
●
Click and hold the time bar, and the mouse pointer shall
change to a hand icon, and then you can drag to view the
playback of the target time.
●
You can drag the vertical orange line on the time bar to
rapidly view the playback in iframe format.
●
When playing back video in one channel mode, you can
move mouse pointer to time bar to display thumbnail
pictures for the video of target time.
●
When playing back video, you can select other channels
as needed. The time bar of newly added channels will be
added up to the time bar of earlier base channels. The
type and time period of newly added channels are the
same with early base channels.
4 Play Status Includes two playback status: Play and Stop.
5 Record Type
Select the checkbox to dene the recording type to search
for.
6 Search Type
Select the content to play back: Record , Picture,
Subperiod.
7 Calendar
Click the date that you want to search, the time bar displays
the corresponding record.
User's Manual
152
No. Function Description
The dates with record or snapshot have a small solid circle
under the date.
8
View Layout and
Channel Selection
●
In the Camera Name list, select the channel(s) that you
want to play back.
●
The window split is decided by how you select the
channel(s). For example, if you select one channel, the
playback is displayed in the single-channel view; if you
select two to four channels, the playback is displayed in
the four-channel view. The maximum is eight channels.
●
Click
to switch the streams. indicates main stream,
and
indicates sub stream.
9 Video Splice Splice a section of recorded video and save it.
10 Backup Back up the recorded video les.
11 List Display
This area includes Tag List and File List.
●
: Click the Tag List button, the marked recorded video
list is displayed. Double-click the le to start playing.
●
: Click the File List button, the searched recorded
video list is displayed. You can lock the les.
12 Full Screen
Click
to display in full screen. In the full screen mode,
point to the bottom of the screen, the time bar is displayed.
Right-click on the screen to exit full screen mode.
13 Time Bar Unit
You can select 24 hr, 2 hr, 1 hr, or 30 min as the unit of time
bar. The time bar display changes with the setting.
5.9.3.1 Introducing Playback Controls Bar
You can perform the operations such as control the speed of playback, add mark, and take
snapshots through the playback controls bar.
Figure 5-98 Playback control bar
The play backward function and playback speed are dependent on the product version. The actual
product shall govern. You can also contact the technical support to consult the hardware version
information.
Table 5-37 Playback control bar description
Icon Function
,
Play/Pause.
During playing back, you can switch between play and pause.
User's Manual
153
Icon Function
Stop.
During playing back, you can click the Stop button to stop
playback.
,
Play backward.
●
During playing back, click the Play Backward button to
backward play the recorded video, the button switches to
; click to stop playing backward.
●
During playing back, click
to start playing forward.
,
Previous and next frame.
●
When the playback is paused, click
or click to play
single-frame recorded video.
●
When playing back single-frame recorded video, click
to start playing forward.
Slow playback.
●
During playing back, click
to set the speed of slow
playback as SlowX1/2, SlowX1/4, SlowX1/8, or SlowX1/16.
●
During fast playback, click
to slow down the speed of
fast playback.
Fast playback.
●
During playing back, click
to set the speed of fast
playback as FastX2, FastX4, FastX8, or FastX16.
●
During slow playback, click
to speed up slow
playback.
,
Previous day and next day.
Click
or click to play the previous day or next day of
the current recorded video.
Adjust volume of playback.
Enable smart search function.
Add lter criteria of smart search. You can select Human ,
Vehicle, or uncheck.
In the full screen mode, click to take a snapshot and save
into the USB storage device or mobile HDD.
Add tag for the recorded view.
User's Manual
154
Icon Function
Show or hide POS information.
During single-channel playback, click
to show or hide POS
information on the screen.
During playback, click this icon to display or hide AI rulers.
Show playback video in full screen.
5.9.3.2 Selecting Search Type
You can search the recorded videos, splice, or snapshots from HDD or external storage device.
●
From R/W Disk: Recorded videos or snapshots playback from HDD of the Device.
Figure 5-99 From R/W disk
●
From I/O Device : Recorded videos playback from external storage device.
●
Click Browse, select the save path of recorded video le that you want to play. Double-click the
video le or click
to start playing.
Figure 5-100 From I/O device
5.9.3.3 Clipping Recorded Video
Background Information
During playback, clip sections of recorded video and save to the USB storage device.
Figure 5-101 Clip
Procedure
Step 1 Select a recorded video that you want to play.
●
Click
to start playing from the beginning.
●
Double-click anywhere in the time bar colored area to start playback.
Step 2 Click on the time bar to select the start time, and then click to start clipping.
Step 3 Click on the time bar to select the end time, and then click to stop clipping.
User's Manual
155
Step 4 Click .
●
You can clip the video of a single-channel or multiple channels.
●
Maximum 1024 les can be backed up at one time.
●
The les that are selected in the File List cannot be clipped.
5.9.3.4 Backing up Recorded Video
Background Information
You can back up the recorded video le or splice video le into the USB storage device.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the recorded video le that you want to back up. You can select the following two
types of les:
●
Recorded video le: Click
, the File List area is displayed. Select the le(s) that you
want to back up.
●
Splice video le. For details about splicing video le, see "5.9.3.3 Clipping Recorded
Video".
Step 2 Click .
Figure 5-102 Backup
Step 3 Click Backup.
If you do not want to back the le, clear the checkbox.
User's Manual
156
5.9.4 Smart Search
Background Information
During playback, you can analyze a certain area to nd if there was any motion detection event
occurred. The system will display the images with motion events of the recorded video.
This function is available on select models.
To use the Smart Search function, you need to enable the motion detection for the channel by
selecting Main Menu > ALARM > Video Detection > Motion Detection.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SEARCH.
Step 2 In the Camera Name list, select the channel(s) that you want to play.
Step 3 Click or double-click anywhere in the time bar colored area to start playback.
Step 4 Click .
The grid is displayed on the screen.
●
Only single-channel supports smart search.
●
If multi-channels are selected, double-click on the channel window to display this
channel only on the screen, and then you can start using smart search function.
Step 5 Drag the pointer to select the searching area.
The grid area supports 22 × 18 (PAL) and 22 × 15 (NTSC).
Step 6 Click to add lter criteria. You can check Human box, Vehicle box, or uncheck.
●
Human: Display the motion alarm of human during selected time and searching area.
●
Vehicle: Display the motion alarm of vehicle during selected time and searching area.
●
Unchecking: Display the general motion alarm which includes both human and
vehicle, during selected time and searching area.
Step 7 Click .
Step 8 The screen starts playing back the motional splices of recorded video for the selected
searching area.
Step 9 Click to exit the smart searching while playback.
5.9.5 Showing AI Rule during Playback
Background Information
To use the AI rule showing function, do the following:
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SEARCH.
Step 2 In the Camera Name list, select the channel(s) that you want to play.
Step 3 Click or double-click anywhere in the time bar colored area to start playback.
You can see the AI rule during playback. This function is enabled by default.
User's Manual
157
Figure 5-103 Playback
Click to hide AI rule.
5.9.6 Marking and Playing Back Video
You can mark the recording for somewhere important. Then you can easily nd the marked
recording by searching time and mark name.
Marking a Video
1. Select Main Menu > SEARCH.
2. In the playback mode, click
.
Figure 5-104 Add tag
3. In theTag Name box, enter a name.
4. Click OK.
User's Manual
158
This marked video le displays in the Tag List.
Playing back Marked Video
This function is supported on single-channel playback.
1. In the Camera Name list, select one channel.
2. Click
.
Figure 5-105 Mark list
3. Double-click the le that you want to play back.
4. To search the marked video by time, in the SEARCH box on the top of the page, enter the time,
and then click
.
User's Manual
159
Playing back Time before the Tag
You can congure to play N seconds of the tagged video before the tagged time.
1. In the Tag Name box, enter the name of a tagged video.
2. In theInterval Before Tag box, enter N seconds.
3. Click
.
The playback starts from N seconds before the tagged time.
If there is N seconds exist before the marked time, the playback starts from N seconds before the
tagged time. If there is not, it plays back as much as there is.
Managing Tagged Video
On the Tag List page, click
.
Figure 5-106 Tag management
●
Be default, it manages all the tagged videos of the selected channel.
●
To search the tagged video, select channel number from the Channel list, enter time in Start
Time box and End Time box, and then click Search.
●
All the tagged videos display in time order.
●
To modify the name of tagged video, double-click a tagged video, the Modify Tag dialog box is
displayed.
●
To delete the marked video, select the tagged video, and then click Delete.
After opening the Tag Management page, the playback will pause until exiting this page. If the
marked video that was in playing back is deleted, the playback will start from the rst tagged video
in the Tag List.
User's Manual
160
5.9.7 Playing Back Snapshots
Background Information
You can search and play back the snapshots.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SEARCH.
Step 2 In the Search Type list, select Picture.
Step 3 In the Channel list, select a channel number.
Step 4 In the Calendar area, select a date.
Step 5 Click .
The system starts playing snapshots according to the congured intervals.
5.9.8 Playing Back Splices
Background Information
You can clip the recorded video les into splices and then play back at the same time to save your
time.
This function is available on select models.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SEARCH.
Step 2 In the Search Type list, select Subperiod; In the Split Mode list, select 4, 9, or 16.
Figure 5-107 Subperiod
Step 3 In the Calendar area, select a date.
Step 4 In the Camera Name list, select a channel.
Only single-channel supports this function.
Step 5 Start playing back splices.
●
Click
, the playback starts from the beginning.
●
Double-click anywhere on the time bar, the playback starts from where you click.
Figure 5-108 Time bar
User's Manual
161
Every recorded video le must be at least ve minutes. If a recorded video le is less than
20 minutes but still choose to split into four windows, the system will automatically adjust
the windows quantity to ensure every splice is more than ve minutes, and in this case it
is possible that there are no images are displaying in some windows.
5.9.9 Using the File List
Background Information
You can view all the recorded videos within a certain period from any channel in the File List.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > VIDEO.
Step 2 Select a channel(s).
Step 3 Click .
User's Manual
162
Figure 5-109 File list
User's Manual
163
Step 4 Start playback.
●
Click
, the playback starts from the rst le by default.
●
Click any le, the system plays back this le.
●
In the time box on the top of the le list page, you can enter the specic time to search
the le that you want to view.
●
In the File List area, there are 128 les can be displayed.
●
File type: R indicates general recorded video; A indicates recorded video with external
alarms; M indicates recorded video with motion detection events; I indicates recorded
video with intelligent vents.
●
Click
to return to the page with calendar and CAM NAME list.
Related Operations
●
To lock the recorded video, on the File List page, select the checkbox of the recorded video,
and then click
. The locked video will not be covered.
●
To view the locked information, click
.
The recorded video that is under writing or overwriting cannot be locked.
●
To unlock the recorded video, in the File Lock page, select the video, and then click Unlock.
Figure 5-110 File lock
User's Manual
164
5.10 Alarm Events Settings
5.10.1 Alarm Information
Background Information
You can search, view and back up the alarm information.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm Info.
Figure 5-111 Alarm info
Step 2 In the Type list, select the event type; In the Start Time box and End Time box, enter the
specic time.
Step 3 Click Search.
The search results are displayed.
Step 4 Click Backup to back up the search results into the external storage device.
●
Click
to play the recorded video of alarm event.
●
Select an event and click Details to view the detailed information of the event.
User's Manual
165
5.10.2 Alarm Input Settings
You can congure the alarm settings for each channel individually or apply the settings to all
channels and then save the settings. For details, see "4.3 Connecting to Alarm Input and Output".
5.10.2.1 Conguring Local Alarms
Background Information
You can connect the alarm device to the alarm input port of the Device. When the alarm is
activated on the alarm device, the alarm information will be uploaded to the Device, and then the
Device outputs the local alarms in the way that you congure in this section.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm-in Port > Local.
Figure 5-112 Local
Step 2 Congure the settings for the local alarms.
Table 5-38 Local alarm settings
Parameter Description
Alarm-in Port Select the channel number.
Alarm Name Enter the customized alarm name.
Enable Enable or disable the local alarm function.
User's Manual
166
Parameter Description
Device Type
In the Device Type list, select NO or select NC as the voltage output
type.
Schedule
Click Setting to congure the parameters.
Dene a period during which the motion detection is active. For
details, see "5.10.4.1 Conguring Motion Detection Settings".
Anti-Dither
Congure the time period from end of event detection to the stop of
alarm.
Alarm-out Port
Click Setting to congure the parameters.
●
Local Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices
connected to the selected output port.
●
Extension Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected
alarm box.
●
Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices
connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Post-Alarm
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o alarm after
the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to
300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Show Message
Select the Show Message checkbox to enable a pop-up message in
your local host PC.
Report Alarm
Select the Report Alarm checkbox to enable the system to upload
the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center) when an
alarm event occurs.
Send Email
Select the Send Email checkbox to enable the system to send an
email notication when an alarm event occurs.
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in Main
Menu > NETWORK > Email.
Record Channel
Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected
channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.
The recording for local alarm recording and auto recording must be
enabled.
PTZ Linkage
Click Setting to display the PTZ page.
Enable PTZ linkage actions, such as selecting the preset that you
want to be called when an alarm event occurs.
Post Record
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o recording
after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300
seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Tour Select the Tour checkbox to enable a tour of the selected channels.
Picture Storage
Select the Snapshot checkbox to take a snapshot of the selected
channel.
User's Manual
167
Parameter Description
To use this function, select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode >
Snapshot, in the Type list, select Event.
Sub Screen
Select the checkbox to enable the function. When an alarm event
occurs, the extra screen outputs the settings congured in Main
Menu > DISPLAY > Tour Setting > Sub Screen.
●
This function is available on select models.
●
To use this function, extra screen shall be enabled.
Video Matrix
Select the checkbox to enable the function. When an alarm event
occurs, the video output port outputs the settings congured in
Main Menu > DISPLAY > Tour Setting.
This function is available on select models.
Buzzer Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.
Log Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.
Disarming
After enabling this function, you can connect a switch to the alarm
input port for disarming control.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
●
Click Default to restore the default setting.
●
Click Copy to, in the Copy to dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you
want to copy the local alarm settings to, and then click Apply.
5.10.2.2 Conguring Alarms from Alarm Box
Background Information
You can connect the alarm box to the RS-485 port of the Device. When the alarm is detected by the
alarm box, the alarm information will be uploaded to the Device, and then the Device outputs the
alarms in the way that you congure in this section.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm-in Port > Alarm Box.
User's Manual
168
Figure 5-113 Alarm box
Step 2 In the Alarm Box list, select the alarm box number corresponding to the address number
congured by the DIP switch on the Alarm Box.
Step 3 In the Alarm-in Port list, select the alarm input port on the Alarm Box.
Step 4 Congure the settings for other parameters of the Alarm Box.
Step 5 Click Apply to complete the settings.
Click Default to restore the default setting.
5.10.2.3 Conguring Alarms from External IP Cameras
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm-in Port > CAM Ext.
User's Manual
169
Figure 5-114 CAM ext
Step 2 Congure the alarm input settings from the external IPC.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
●
Click Default to restore the default setting.
●
Click Copy to to copy the settings to other channels.
●
Click Refresh to refresh congured settings.
5.10.2.4 Conguring Alarms for IP Camera Oine
Background Information
You can congure the alarm settings for the situation when the IP camera is oine.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm-in Port > CAM Oine.
User's Manual
170
Figure 5-115 CAM oine
Step 2 Congure the alarm input settings from the oine IPC.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
●
Click Default to restore the default setting.
●
Click Copy to to copy the settings to other channels.
5.10.2.5 Conguring Alarms from HDCVI Devices
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm-in Port > HDCVI Alarm.
User's Manual
171
Figure 5-116 HDCVI alarm
Step 2 In the Channel list, select a channel or All.
Step 3 Click .
Step 4 Congure the settings for other parameters of the Alarm Box.
Step 5 Click OK to save the settings.
Step 6 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.10.3 Alarm Output Settings
5.10.3.1 Conguring Alarm Output
Background Information
When the Device activates alarms, the connected alarm device generates alarms in the way that
you can congure in this section. You can connect to the output port of the Device or connect
wirelessly.
●
Auto : When an alarm event is triggered on the Device, the connected alarm device generates
alarms.
●
Manual : The alarm device is forced to keep generating alarms.
●
Stop : The alarm output function is not enabled.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm-out Port > Alarm Mode.
User's Manual
172
Figure 5-117 Alarm mode
Step 2 Congure the settings for the alarm output.
Table 5-39 Alarm output settings
Parameter Description
Local Alarm
Alarm Type Select alarm type for each alarm output port.
Status Indicates the status of each alarm output port.
Extension Alarm
Alarm Box
Select the alarm box number corresponding to the
address number congured by the DIP switch on the
Alarm Box.
Alarm Type Select the alarm type for each alarm output ports.
Status Indicates the status of each alarm output port.
Alarm Reset Click OK to clear all alarm output status.
Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.
5.10.3.2 Conguring Warning Light
Background Information
When the motion detection alarm is activated, the system links the camera to generate warning
light alarm.
To use this function, connect at least one warning light camera to your Device.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm-out Port > Warning Light.
User's Manual
173
Figure 5-118 Warning light
Step 2 Congure the settings for the warning light parameters.
Table 5-40 Warning light parameters
Parameter Description
Channel
In the Channel list, select a channel that is connected to a warning
light camera.
Delay
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o alarm after the
alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 30 seconds,
and the default value is 5 seconds.
Mode Set the alarm mode of warning light to be Always on or Flicker.
Flicker Frequency
When setting the alarm mode of warning light to be Flash , you can
select the ash frequency from Low, Middle, and High.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.10.3.3 Conguring Siren
Background Information
When the motion detection alarm is activated, the system links the camera to generate sound
alarm.
To use this function, connect at least one camera that supports audio function.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm-out Port > Siren.
User's Manual
174
Figure 5-119 Siren
Step 2 Congure the settings for the siren parameters.
Table 5-41 Siren parameters
Parameter Description
Channel
In the Channel list, select a channel that is connected to a
camera that supports audio function.
Play Click Play to manually trigger the IP camera to play audio le.
Delay
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o alarm after
the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 30
seconds, and the default value is 5 seconds.
Audio Clip
Select the audio clip for the siren sound. The default setting is
Clip 1.
Volume
Select the volume for the audio clip. You can select the ash
frequency from Low , Middle, and High.
Update Audio Clip
Import the upgrade audio le (.bin or .wav) to upgrade the alarm
audio le of the camera.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
Related Operations
You can update the audio les of the camera on the local interface.
1. Prepare a USB device or other external storage device and plug it into the Device.
2. Click Browse.
3. Select the upgrade audio le (.bin or .wav).
4. Click OK to return to the Siren page.
5. Click Upgrade to upgrade the alarm audio le of the camera.
User's Manual
175
Figure 5-120 Browse
5.10.3.4 Conguring Smart Illumination
Background Information
The linkage action of smart illumination can extend for a period after the event ends.
To use this function, connect a camera that supports smart illumination.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Alarm-out Port > Smart Illumination.
Figure 5-121 Smart illumination
Step 2 Select a channel and then set the delay time.
Step 3 Click Apply.
User's Manual
176
The illuminator remains on during the delay period after the linked event ends.
5.10.4 Video Detection
Video detection adopts computer vision and image processing technology. The technology
analyzes the video images to detect the obvious changes such as moving objects and blurriness.
The system activates alarms when such changes are detected.
5.10.4.1 Conguring Motion Detection Settings
Background Information
When the moving object appears and moves fast enough to reach the preset sensitivity value, the
system activates the alarm.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Video Detection > Motion Detection.
Figure 5-122 Motion
Step 2 Congure the settings for the motion detection parameters.
Table 5-42 Motion detection parameters
Parameter Description
Channel In the Channel list, select a channel to set the motion detection.
Region Click Setting to dene the motion detection region.
Enable Enable or disable the motion detection function.
User's Manual
177
Parameter Description
PIR Alarm
PIR function helps enhancing the accuracy and validity of motion
detect. It can lter the meaningless alarms that are activated by the
objects such as falling leaves, ies. The detection range by PIR is
smaller than the eld angle.
PIR function is enabled by default if it is supported by the cameras.
Enabling PIR function will get the motion detect to be enabled
automatically to generate motion detection alarms; if the PIR function
is not enabled, the motion detect just has the general eect.
●
Only when the channel type is CVI, the PIR function can be enabled.
●
If the camera does not support PIR function, it will be unusable.
●
If the Device does not support PIR function, it will not be displayed
on the page.
Schedule Dene a period during which the motion detection is active.
Anti-Dither
Congure the time period from end of event detection to the stop of
alarm.
Alarm-out Port
Click Setting to congure the parameters.
●
General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices
connected to the selected output port.
●
External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected
alarm box.
●
Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices connected
by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Post-Alarm
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o alarm after the
external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300
seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds. If you enter 0, there will
be no delay.
Show Message
Select the Show Message checkbox to enable a pop-up message in
your local host PC.
Report Alarm
Select the Report Alarm checkbox to enable the system to upload the
alarm signal to the network (including alarm center) when an alarm
event occurs.
Send Email
Select the Send Email checkbox to enable the system to send an
email notication when an alarm event occurs.
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in Main
Menu > NETWORK > Email.
Record Channel
Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s)
starts recording after an alarm event occurs.
The recording for motion detection and auto recording function must
be enabled.
PTZ Linkage Click Setting to display the PTZ page.
User's Manual
178
Parameter Description
Motion Detect can only activate PTZ preset.
Post Record
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o recording after
the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300
seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Tour Select the Tour checkbox to enable a tour of the selected channels.
Picture Storage
Select the Snapshot checkbox to take a snapshot of the selected
channel.
To use this function, select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode >
Snapshot, in the Type list, select Event.
Sub Screen
Select the checkbox to enable the function. When an alarm event
occurs, the extra screen outputs the settings congured in Main
Menu > DISPLAY > Tour > Sub Screen.
●
This function is available on select models.
●
To use this function, extra screen shall be enabled.
Video Matrix
Select the checkbox to enable the function. When an alarm event
occurs, the video output port outputs the settings congured in Main
Menu > DISPLAY > Tour.
This function is available on select models.
Buzzer Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.
Log Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.
Alarm Tone
Select to enable audio broadcast/alarm tones in response to a motion
detection event.
Warning Light Select the checkbox to enable warning light alarm of the camera.
Siren Select the checkbox to enable sound alarm of the camera.
Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.
●
Click Default to restore the default setting.
●
Click Copy to , in the Copy to dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you
want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.
●
Click Test to test the settings.
5.10.4.1.1 Setting the Motion Detection Region
Procedure
Step 1 Next to Region , click Setting.
User's Manual
179
Step 2 Point to the middle top of the page.
Figure 5-123 Detection setting
Step 3 Congure the regions settings. You can congure totally four regions.
a. Select one region, for example, click
.
b. Drag on the screen to select the region that you want to detect.
The selected area shows the color that represents the region.
c. Congure the parameters.
Table 5-43 Detection region setting
Parameter Description
Name Enter a name for the region.
Sensitivity
Every region of every channel has an individual sensitivity value.
The bigger the value is, the easier the alarms can be activated.
Threshold
Adjust the threshold for motion detect. Every region of every
channel has an individual threshold.
When anyone of the four regions activates motion detect alarm, the channel where
this region belongs to will activate motion detect alarm.
Step 4 Right-click on the screen to exit the region setting page.
Step 5 On the Motion Detection page, click Apply to complete the settings.
5.10.4.1.2 Setting Motion Detection Period
Background Information
The system only activates the alarm in the dened period.
Procedure
Step 1 Next to Schedule , click Setting.
User's Manual
180
Figure 5-124 Setting
Step 2 Dene the motion detection period. By default, it is active all the time.
●
Dene the period by drawing.
●
Dene the period by editing. Take Sunday as an example.
1. Click
.
Figure 5-125 Period
2. Enter the time frame for the period, and then select the checkbox to enable the
settings.
3. Click OK to save the settings.
Step 3 On the Motion Detection page, click Apply to complete the settings.
User's Manual
181
5.10.4.2 Conguring Video Loss Settings
Background Information
When the video loss occurs, the system activates the alarm.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Video Detection > Video Loss.
Figure 5-126 Video loss
Step 2 Congure the settings for the video loss detection parameters. For details, see "5.10.4.1
Conguring Motion Detection Settings".
For PTZ activation, dierent from motion detection, the video loss detection can activate
PTZ preset, tour, and pattern.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
●
Click Default to restore the default setting.
●
Click Copy to , in the Copy to dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you
want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.
5.10.4.3 Conguring Tampering Settings
Background Information
When the camera lens is covered, or the video is displayed in a single color because of the causes
such as sunlight status, the monitoring cannot be continued normally. To avoid such situations, you
can congure the tampering alarm settings.
User's Manual
182
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Video Detection > Video Tampering.
Figure 5-127 Video tampering
Step 2 Congure the settings for the tampering detection parameters. For details, see "5.10.4.1
Conguring Motion Detection Settings".
For PTZ activation, dierent from motion detection, the video loss detection can activate
PTZ preset, tour, and pattern.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
●
Click Default to restore the default setting.
●
Click Copy to, in the Copy to dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you
want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.
5.10.5 System Events
You can congure the alarm output for three types of system event (HDD, Network, and User).
When there is an abnormal system event occurs, the system activates alarms in the way that you
congure in this section.
User's Manual
183
5.10.5.1 Conguring HDD Event Settings
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Exception > Disk.
Figure 5-128 Disk
Step 2 Congure the settings for the HDD event.
Table 5-44 HDD event settings
Parameter Description
Event Type
In the Event Type list, select No Disk, Disk Error, or Low
Space as the event type.
Enable Enable or disable the HDD event detection function.
Alarm-out Port
Click Setting to congure the parameters.
●
Local Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm
devices connected to the selected output port.
●
Extension Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the
connected alarm box.
●
Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices
connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Post-Alarm
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o alarm
after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from
10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10
seconds.
Show Message
Select the Show Message checkbox to enable a pop-up
message in your local host PC.
User's Manual
184
Parameter Description
Report Alarm
Select the Report Alarm checkbox to enable the system to
upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm
center) when an alarm event occurs.
Send Email
Select the Send Email checkbox to enable the system to
send an email notication when an alarm event occurs.
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled
in Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.
Buzzer Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.
Log
Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a local
alarm log.
Alarm Tone
Select to enable audio broadcast/alarm tone in response to
an HDD alarm event.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.10.5.2 Conguring Network Event Settings
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Exception > Network.
Figure 5-129 Network
Step 2 Congure the settings for the Network event.
User's Manual
185
Table 5-45 Network event settings
Parameter Description
Event Type
In the Event Type list, select Oine, IP Conict, or MAC
Conict as the event type.
Enable Enable or disable the Network event detection function.
Alarm-out Port
Click Setting to congure the parameters.
●
General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm
devices connected to the selected output port.
●
External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the
connected alarm box.
●
Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices
connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Post-Alarm
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o alarm
after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10
seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Show Message
Select the Show Message checkbox to enable a pop-up
message in your local host PC.
Send Email
Select the Send Email checkbox to enable the system to send
an email notication when an alarm event occurs.
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in
Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.
Buzzer Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.
Log
Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a local alarm
log.
Post Record
Continue to record for some time after the alarm is ended. The
value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Alarm Tone
Select to enable audio broadcast/alarm tones in response to a
network alarm event.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.10.6 Conguring Disarming
Background Information
You can disarm all alarm linkage actions as needed.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > Disarming.
Step 2 Click to enable disarming.
User's Manual
186
Figure 5-130 Disarming
Step 3 Click Setting next to Duration of Disarm by Period to congure periods.
User's Manual
187
Figure 5-131 Setting
Step 4 (Optional) Select O to disable event notications.
With Disarming enabled, if you disable event notications, event notications will not be
pushed to the clients including the mobile app, platform and cloud platform.
Step 5 Select alarm linkage actions to disarm.
All alarm linkage actions will be disarmed when you select All.
Step 6 Click Apply.
5.11 AI Function
5.11.1 Conguring AI Mode
Background Information
To use AI functions, you need to enable the corresponding AI mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > AI Mode.
User's Manual
188
Figure 5-132 AI mode
Step 2 Select an AI mode
●
When SMD is selected, only SMD is available.
●
When Face is selected, only face detection and face recognition are available.
●
When IVS&SMD is selected, only IVS and SMD are available.
SMD, face detection, face recognition and IVS cannot be enabled simultaneously.
5.11.2 For Pro AI Series
The faces are fuzzily processed to comply with relevant regulations.
AI module provides face detection, face recognition, IVS functions, and video structuring. These
functions take eect after they are congured and enabled. It adopts deep learning and can realize
precision alarms.
●
Face detection: The Device can analyze the faces captured by the camera and link the
congured alarms.
●
Face recognition: The Device can compare the captured faces with the face database and then
link the congured alarms.
●
IVS: The IVS function processes and analyzes the human and vehicle images to extract the key
information to match with the preset rules. When the detected behaviors match with the rules,
the system activates alarms. The IVS function can avoid wrong alarms by ltering the factors
such as rains, light, and animals.
●
Video structuring: The device can detect and extract key features from the human bodies and
non-motor vehicles in the video, and then build a structured database. You can search any
target you need with these features. For example, you can search any people who wears yellow
short sleeve shirt.
5.11.2.1 Face Detection
The Device can analyze the pictures captured by the camera to detect whether the faces are on the
pictures. You can search and lter the recorded videos the faces and play back.
If you select AI by device, then among face detection and recognition, IVS function, and video
structuring, you can use one of them at the same time for the same channel.
User's Manual
189
5.11.2.1.1 Conguring Face Detection Parameters
Background Information
The alarms are generated according to the congured parameters.
Procedure
Step 1 Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Face Detection.
Figure 5-133 Face detection
Step 2 In the Channel list, select a channel that you want to congure face detection function,
and then enable it.
Step 3 Select AI by Camera or AI by Device as the AI type.
●
AI by Camera : This option requires certain AI cameras. The camera will do all the AI
analysis, and then give the results to the DVR.
●
AI by Device : The camera only transmits normal video stream to the DVR, and then
the DVR will do all the AI analysis.
Step 4 Click Setting next to Rule draw areas to lter the target.
You can congure two ltering targets (maximum size and minimum size). When the
target is smaller than the minimum size or larger than the maximum size, no alarms will
be activated. The maximum size should be larger than the minimum size.
Step 5 Congure the schedule and linkage parameters.
Table 5-46 Schedule and linkage parameters
Parameter Description
Schedule Dene a period during which the detection is active.
User's Manual
190
Parameter Description
Alarm-out Port
Click Setting to congure the parameters.
●
General Alarm: Enable general alarm and select the alarm
output port.
●
External Alarm: Connect the alarm box to the Device and then
enable it.
●
Wireless Siren: Connect the wireless gateway to the Device and
then enable it.
When an alarm event occurs, the system links the peripheral
alarm devices connected to the selected output port.
Post-Alarm
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o alarm after
the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds
to 300 seconds. If you enter 0, there will be no delay.
Show Message
Select the Show Message checkbox to enable a pop-up alarm
message in your local host PC.
Report Alarm
Select the Report Alarm checkbox to enable the system to
upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center)
when an alarm event occurs.
●
This function is available on select models.
●
The corresponding parameters in the alarm center should be
congured.
Send Email
Select the Send Email checkbox to enable the system to send an
email notication when an alarm event occurs.
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in
Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.
Record Channel
Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected
channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.
The recording for intelligence event and auto recording function
must be enabled.
PTZ Linkage
Click Setting to display the PTZ page.
To use this function, the PTZ operations must be congured.
Post Record
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o recording
after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to
300 seconds.
Tour
Select the Tour checkbox to enable a tour of the selected
channels.
User's Manual
191
Parameter Description
●
To use this function, the tour setting must be congured.
●
After the tour is ended, the live view screen returns to the view
layout before tour started.
Picture Storage
Select the Picture Storage checkbox to take a snapshot of the
selected channel.
To use this function, make sure the snapshot function is enabled
for Intel in Main Menu > STORAGE > Schedule > Snapshot.
Video Matrix
Select the checkbox to enable the function. When an alarm event
occurs, the video output port outputs the settings congured in
Main Menu > DISPLAY > TOUR > Extra Screen.
●
This function is available on select models.
●
The extra screen must be enabled to support this function.
Buzzer Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.
Log
Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a local alarm
log.
Alarm Tone
Select to enable audio broadcast in response to a face detection
event.
Warning Light
Select the checkbox to enable the warning light alarm of the
camera.
Siren Select the checkbox to enable the sound alarm of the camera.
Smart Illumination
Select the checkbox to enable the smart illumination of the
camera.
Step 6 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.11.2.1.2 Searching for and Playing Detected Faces
Background Information
You can search the detected faces and play back.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Face Detection.
User's Manual
192
Figure 5-134 Face detection
Step 2 Select the channel, enter the start time and end time, and set for the gender, age, glasses,
beard, and mask.
Step 3 Click Smart Search.
The results are displayed.
User's Manual
193
Figure 5-135 Search results
Step 4 Select the face that you want to play back.
User's Manual
194
Figure 5-136 Registered information
Step 5 Click to start playing back the recorded detected face snapshots.
Double-click on the playing page to switch between full screen playing and thumbnail
playing.
You can also do the following operations to the recorded les.
●
To export the database le (.csv) to the external storage device, select les, click
Export, and then select the save path.
●
To back up the recorded les to the external storage device, select les, click Backup ,
select the save path and le type, and then click Start.
User's Manual
195
Figure 5-137 Backup
●
To lock the les to make it unable to be overwritten, select the les, and then click
Lock.
●
To add a mark to the le, select the les and then click Add Tag.
5.11.2.2 Face Recognition
Face recognition applies to AI preview mode and smart search.
●
AI preview mode: Supports comparing the detected faces with the face database, and display
the comparison results.
●
Smart search: Supports faces searching by faces attributes or portraits.
●
If you select AI by device, then among face detection and recognition, IVS function, and video
structuring, you can use one of them at the same time for the same channel.
●
Before enabling face recognition function for a channel, the face detection must be enabled rst
for this channel.
5.11.2.2.1 Creating a Face Database
Background Information
You should create a face database for comparing the detected faces and the faces in the database.
The Device supports creating maximum 20 databases and registering 100,000 faces.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Database > Face Database Cong.
User's Manual
196
Figure 5-138 Face database conguration
Step 2 At Type , you can select Local or Remote.
●
Local : Viewing the existing face databases or adding new one on the DVR.
●
Remote : If you have face recognition camera, you can select this to view the existing
face databases or adding new one on the camera.
Step 3 Click Add.
User's Manual
197
Figure 5-139 Add face database
Step 4 Enter the face database name, and then click OK.
●
Click
to modify database name.
●
Click
to view the database details and add new faces to the database.
●
Select the database, and then click Modeling. The system will extract the attributes of
face pictures in the database for the future comparison.
●
Select the database, and then click Delete to delete the database.
User's Manual
198
Figure 5-140 Congure database
5.11.2.2.2 Adding Face Pictures
You can add face pictures to the existing databases one by one or by batch, or add from the
detected faces.
To add face pictures one by one or by batch, you need to get the pictures from the USB storage
device. The picture size should be smaller than 256K with resolution between 200 × 200–6000 ×
5000.
Adding One Face Picture
1. Select Main Menu > AI > Database > Face Database Cong.
2. Click of the database that you want to congure.
User's Manual
199
Figure 5-141 Details
3. Click Register ID.
User's Manual
200
Figure 5-142 Register ID
4. Click to add a face picture.
Figure 5-143 Browse
5. Select a face picture and enter the registration information.
User's Manual
201
Figure 5-144 Register ID
6. Click OK.
The system prompts the registration is successful.
7. On the Details page, click Search.
The system prompts modeling is successful.
If the system prompts the message indicating modeling is in process, wait a while and then click
Search again. If modeling is failed, the registered face picture cannot be used for face
recognition.
User's Manual
202
Figure 5-145 Details
Adding Face Pictures in Batches
1. Give a name to the face picture.
Table 5-47 Register ID
Naming format Description
Name Enter the name.
Gender Enter 1 or 2. 1 represents male, and 2 represents female.
Birthday Enter numbers in the format of yyyy-mm-dd.
Country Enter the abbreviation of country. For example, CN for China.
ID Type
1 represents ID card; 2 represents passport; 3 represents ocer
password.
ID No. Enter the ID number.
Address Enter the address.
2. On the Details page, click Batch register.
User's Manual
203
Figure 5-146 Batch register
3. Click Select le, max select 500 each time or Select a folder to import face pictures.
4. Click OK to complete batch registration.
Adding the Detected Faces
1. Right-click on the live view screen, and then select Live Mode > AI Mode.
Figure 5-147 AI mode live view
2. Double-click the detected face snapshot that you want to add.
User's Manual
204
Figure 5-148 Playback
3. Click Add to Human Face Database.
Figure 5-149 Register ID
4. Select the face database and enter the ID information.
5. Click OK to complete registration.
User's Manual
205
5.11.2.2.3 Face Recognition Conguration
Background Information
You can compare the detected faces with the faces in the database to judge if the detected face
belongs to the database. The comparison result will be displayed on the AI mode live view screen
and smart search page, and link the alarms.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Face Recognition.
Figure 5-150 Face recognition
Step 2 In the Channel list, select a channel that you want to congure face recognition function,
and then enable it.
Step 3 Set the Schedule. For details, see "5.10.4.1.2 Setting Motion Detection Period".
Step 4 Set Target Face Database.
1. Click Setting.
User's Manual
206
Figure 5-151 Face database
2. Select one or multiple face databases.
3. Click OK.
The selected face database is listed.
Figure 5-152 Selected face database
Step 5 Congure the added face database.
●
Click
to modify the similarity. The lower the number is, the easier the alarm linkage
will trigger.
●
Click
to delete the face database.
●
Click
to set the alarm linkage.
User's Manual
207
●
After setting is completed, click OK.
Step 6 (Optional) (Optional) Enable the Stranger Mode.
1. Enable the Stranger mode ( ). When the detected faces do not belong to the
face database, the system remarks the face as "Stranger".
2. Click Setting to set the alarm linkage.
3. After setting is completed, click OK.
Step 7 Click Apply to complete the settings.
After the face recognition function is enabled, right-click on the live view screen, and then
select Live Mode > AI Mode.
●
If the detected face belongs to the enabled face database, the similarity result is
displayed.
●
If the detected face does not belong to the enabled face database, the face will be
remarked as "Stranger".
Figure 5-153 Similarity result
5.11.2.2.4 Smart Search for Face Recognition
You can compare the detected faces with the face database and play back.
●
Search by attributes: Search the face database by the face attributes.
●
Search by picture: Search the face database by uploading face pictures.
Searching by Attributes
1. Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Face Recognition > Search by Attributes.
User's Manual
208
Figure 5-154 Search by attributes
2. Select the channel and set the parameters such as start time, end time, gender, age, glasses,
beard, mask, and similarity according to your requirement.
3. Click Smart Search.
User's Manual
209
Figure 5-155 Smart search
4. Click the picture that you want to play back.
User's Manual
210
Figure 5-156 Registered information
5. Click to play back the recorded video.
Double-click on the playing page to switch between full screen playing and thumbnail playing.
You can also do the following operations to the recorded les.
●
To export the database le (.csv) to the external storage device, select les, click Export, and
then select the save path.
●
To back up the recorded les to the external storage device, select les, click Backup , select
the save path and le type, and then click Start.
User's Manual
211
Figure 5-157 Backup
●
To lock the les to make it unable to be overwritten, select the les, and then click Lock.
●
To add a mark to the le, select the les and then click Add Tag.
Search by Picture
1. Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Face Recognition > Search by Picture.
User's Manual
212
Figure 5-158 Search by picture
2. Upload face pictures from Face Database or Local Upload.
Maximum 30 pictures can be uploaded at one time, and the system support searching 8 pictures
at one time.
●
Face Database
a. Click Face Database.
User's Manual
213
Figure 5-159 Face database
b. Set the searching parameters by selecting the face database and gender, and entering
name and ID No. according to your actual requirement.
c. Click Search to display the results that satisfy the requirement.
Click Reset to clear the searching parameters.
d. Select the picture and then click OK.
User's Manual
214
Figure 5-160 Uploaded picture
●
Local Upload
Plug the USB storage device (with face pictures) to the Device, and then click Local Upload .
Then select the picture from the USB storage device, and then click OK. The selected face
pictures are uploaded.
3. After the face pictures are uploaded, continue to congure other parameters (channel, start
time, end time, and similarity).
4. Click Smart Search.
The searching results are displayed.
User's Manual
215
Figure 5-161 Search results
5. Select the face picture that you want to play back.
User's Manual
216
Figure 5-162 Playback
6. Click to play back the recorded video.
Double-click on the playing page to switch between full screen playing and thumbnail playing.
You can also do the following operations to the recorded les.
●
To add a mark to the le, select the les and then click Add Tag.
●
To lock the les to make it unable to be overwritten, select the les, and then click Lock.
●
To back up the recorded les to the external storage device, select les, click Backup , select
the save path and le type, and then click Start.
User's Manual
217
Figure 5-163 Backup
5.11.2.3 IVS Function
The IVS function processes and analyzes the images to extract the key information to match with
the preset rules. When the detected behaviors match with the rules, the system activates alarms.
If you select AI by device, then among face detection and recognition, IVS function, and video
structuring, you can use one of them at the same time for the same channel.
5.11.2.3.1 Conguring IVS Parameters
Background Information
The alarms are generated according to the congured parameters.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > IVS.
User's Manual
218
Figure 5-164 IVS
Step 2 In the Channel list, select the channel number that you want to congure the IVS
function.
Step 3 At Type , you can select from AI by Camera and AI by Device.
●
AI by Camera : This option requires certain AI cameras. The camera will do all the AI
analysis, and then give the results to the DVR.
●
AI by Device : The camera only transmits normal video stream to the DVR, and then
the DVR will do all the AI analysis.
Step 4 Click Add.
Figure 5-165 Added rule
Step 5 Congure the parameters for the rule that you selected. For details on the conguration
of the tripwire or intrusion rule, see "5.11.2.3.2 Conguring Tripwire Rules" and "5.11.2.3.3
Conguring Intrusion Rules".
Step 6 Select the checkbox of the rule to enable it.
Step 7 Click Apply to complete the settings.
User's Manual
219
5.11.2.3.2 Conguring Tripwire Rules
Background Information
When the target object crosses the tripwire in the dened direction, the system activates alarms.
●
The tripwire can be congured as a straight line or broken line.
●
Supports detecting one-way or two-way tripwire crossing.
●
Supports multiple tripwires in the same scenario to meet the complexity.
●
Supports size ltering for target.
Procedure
Step 1 On the rule line that you added, in the Type list, select Tripwire.
Figure 5-166 Tripwire
Step 2 Draw a tripwire.
1. In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to congure the rules for.
2. Click
.
The monitoring screen to congure the tripwire rules is displayed.
User's Manual
220
Figure 5-167 Tripwire rule
3. Click to draw the minimum size or maximum size to lter the target.
The system triggers an alarm only when the size of detected target is between the
maximum size and the minimum size.
4. Congure the parameters.
Table 5-48 Tripwire parameters
Parameter Description
Name Enter the customized rule name.
Direction
Set the direction of the tripwire. You can choose A to B (left to
right), B to A (right to left), and Both.
Sensitivity
Congure the detection sensitivity.
The higher the value, the easier to trigger an alarm but
meanwhile the higher false alarm rate.
Target Filter
Click
and then select eective target. With Human and
Motor Vehicle selected by default, the system automatically
identies the person and motor vehicle appeared within the
monitoring range.
Eective Target
5. Drag to draw a tripwire. The tripwire can be a straight line, broken line or polygon.
6. Click OK to save the settings.
Step 3 Click to set the actions to be triggered.
User's Manual
221
Figure 5-168 Trigger
Step 4 Congure the triggering parameters.
Table 5-49 Schedule and linkage parameters
Parameter Description
Schedule Dene a period during which the detection is active.
Alarm-out Port
Click Setting to congure the parameters.
●
General Alarm: Enable general alarm and select the alarm
output port.
●
External Alarm: Connect the alarm box to the Device and then
enable it.
●
Wireless Siren: Connect the wireless gateway to the Device and
then enable it.
When an alarm event occurs, the system links the peripheral
alarm devices connected to the selected output port.
Post-Alarm
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o alarm after
the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds
to 300 seconds. If you enter 0, there will be no delay.
Show Message
Select the Show Message checkbox to enable a pop-up alarm
message in your local host PC.
Report Alarm
Select the Report Alarm checkbox to enable the system to
upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center)
when an alarm event occurs.
User's Manual
222
Parameter Description
●
This function is available on select models.
●
The corresponding parameters in the alarm center should be
congured.
Send Email
Select the Send Email checkbox to enable the system to send an
email notication when an alarm event occurs.
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in
Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.
Record Channel
Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected
channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.
The recording for intelligence event and auto recording function
must be enabled.
PTZ Linkage
Click Setting to display the PTZ page.
To use this function, the PTZ operations must be congured.
Post Record
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o recording
after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to
300 seconds.
Tour
Select the Tour checkbox to enable a tour of the selected
channels.
●
To use this function, the tour setting must be congured.
●
After the tour is ended, the live view screen returns to the view
layout before tour started.
Picture Storage
Select the Picture Storage checkbox to take a snapshot of the
selected channel.
To use this function, make sure the snapshot function is enabled
for Intel in Main Menu > STORAGE > Schedule > Snapshot.
Video Matrix
Select the checkbox to enable the function. When an alarm event
occurs, the video output port outputs the settings congured in
Main Menu > DISPLAY > TOUR > Extra Screen.
●
This function is available on select models.
●
The extra screen must be enabled to support this function.
User's Manual
223
Parameter Description
Buzzer Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.
Log
Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a local alarm
log.
Alarm Tone
Select to enable audio broadcast in response to a face detection
event.
Warning Light
Select the checkbox to enable the warning light alarm of the
camera.
Siren Select the checkbox to enable the sound alarm of the camera.
Smart Illumination
Select the checkbox to enable the smart illumination of the
camera.
Step 5 Click OK to save the settings.
Step 6 Select the Enable checkbox, and then click Apply.
The tripwire detecting function is active. When the target object crosses the tripwire in
the dened direction, the system activates alarms.
5.11.2.3.3 Conguring Intrusion Rules
Background Information
When the target enters and leaves the dened detection area, or the target appears in the dened
area, the system activates alarms.
●
You can dene the shape and quantity of intrusion areas.
●
Supports detecting the behaviors that enter and leave the intrusion areas.
●
Supports detecting the behaviors that are moving in the intrusion areas. The quantity of areas
and lasting time can be congured.
●
Supports size ltering for target.
Procedure
Step 1 On the rule line that you added, in the Type list, select Intrusion.
User's Manual
224
Figure 5-169 Intrusion
Step 2 Draw an area.
1. In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to congure the rules for.
2. Click
.
Figure 5-170 Intrusion rule
3. Congure the settings for the parameters of drawing rules.
User's Manual
225
Table 5-50 Intrusion parameters
Parameter Description
Name Enter the customized rule name.
Sensitivity
Congure the detection sensitivity.
The higher the value, the easier to trigger an alarm but
meanwhile the higher false alarm rate.
Action Set the intrusion action, including appear and crossing area.
Direction
Set the intrusion direction. You can select Enter , Exit, and
Both.
Target Filter
Click
and then select eective target. With Human and
Motor Vehicle selected by default, the system automatically
identies the person and motor vehicle appeared within the
monitoring range.
Eective Target
4. Drag to draw an area.
5. Click OK to save the settings.
Step 3 Click to set the actions to be triggered.
Step 4 Select the Enable checkbox, and then click Apply.
The intrusion detecting function is active. When the target enters and leaves the area, or
the target appears in the dened area, the system activates alarms.
5.11.2.3.4 Smart Search for IVS Function
Background Information
You can search for the intelligent events and play back.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > IVS.
Figure 5-171 IVS
Step 2 In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to search for the events, and then
set other parameters such as start time, end time, event type, and alarm object.
User's Manual
226
Step 3 Click Smart Search.
The results that satisfy the searching conditions are displayed.
Figure 5-172 Search results
Step 4 Click the picture that you want to play back.
Figure 5-173 Playback
Step 5 Click to play back the recorded video.
User's Manual
227
Double-click on the playing page to switch between full screen playing and thumbnail
playing.
You can also do the following operations to the recorded les.
●
To back up the recorded les to the external storage device, select les, click Backup ,
select the save path and le type, and then click Start.
Figure 5-174 Backup
●
To lock the les to make it unable to be overwritten, select the les, and then click
Lock.
●
To add a mark to the le, select the les and then click Add Tag.
5.11.2.4 Video Structuring
The device can detect and extract key features from the human bodies and non-motor vehicles in
the video, and then build a structured database. You can search any target you need with these
features.
5.11.2.4.1 Conguring Video Structuring
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Video Structuring.
Figure 5-175 Video structuring
User's Manual
228
Step 2 In the Channel list, select a channel that you want to congure video structuring
function, and then enable it.
Step 3 At Type , you can select from AI by Camera and AI by Device.
●
AI by Camera : This option requires certain AI cameras. The camera will do all the AI
analysis, and then give the results to the DVR.
●
AI by Device : The camera only transmits normal video stream to the DVR, and then
the DVR will do all the AI analysis.
Step 4 You can select from Human Detection, Face Detect, and Non-motor Vehicle.
●
Human Detection : Select this option, and then the device will analyze all the human
body features in the video, including Top, Top Color, Bottom, Bottom Color, Hat, Bag,
Gender, Age, and Umbrella. You can search the target you need with these features.
●
Face Detect : You need to select Human Detection rst, and then you can select this
option. If you select this option, and there is any human face appears in the video,
then there will be an extra face image and some extra face features in the human body
detection results, including Glasses, Expression, Mask, and Beard. You can search the
target you need with these features.
●
Non-motor Vehicle : Select this option, and then the device will analyze all the non-
motor vehicle features in the video, including Type, Vehicle Color, People Number, and
Helmet. You can search the target you need with these features.
Step 5 Click Apply.
5.11.2.4.2 Smart Search for Video Structuring
You can search the target you need with human body features or non-motor vehicle features
Human Body Detection
1. Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Human Body Detection.
User's Manual
229
Figure 5-176 Human body detection
2. Select the channel and the time, and then select one or multiple features.
3. Click Smart Search.
●
If you only selected Human Detection and did not select Face Detect in Main Menu > AI >
Parameters > Video Structuring, there will be only human body features displayed in the
results.
●
If you selected Human Detection and Face Detect in Main Menu > AI > Parameters >
Video Structuring, and there is any human face appears in the video, there will be extra face
features displayed in the results.
4. Select one or multiple results, and then you can
●
Click Export to export them to the USB device
●
Click Backup to make backup in the DVR
●
Click Lock so that they don't get overwritten or deleted
●
Click Add Tag to name them as needed.
Non-motor Vehicle Detection
1. Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > Non-motor Vehicle Detection.
User's Manual
230
Figure 5-177 Non-motor vehicle detection
2. Select the channel and the time, and then select one or multiple features.
3. Click Smart Search.
Figure 5-178 Search results
4. Select one or multiple results, and then you can
User's Manual
231
●
Click Export to export them to the USB device
●
Click Backup to make backup in the DVR
●
Click Lock so that they don't get overwritten or deleted
●
Click Add Tag to name them as needed.
5.11.3 For Lite AI Series
AI module provides SMD (Smart Motion Detection) and IVS functions. These functions take eect
after they are congured and enabled. It adopts deep learning and can realize precision alarms. You
can only enable one of them to the same channel at the same time.
●
SMD: The device can detect and classify humans and vehicles in the image.
●
IVS: The IVS function processes and analyzes the human and vehicle images to extract the key
information to match with the preset rules. When the detected behaviors match with the rules,
the system activates alarms. The IVS function can avoid wrong alarms by ltering the factors
such as rains, light, and animals.
●
Face detection: The Device can analyze the faces captured by the camera and link the
congured alarms. This function is available for XVR5X-I and XVR7X-I series only.
●
Face recognition: The Device can compare the captured faces with the face database and then
link the congured alarms. This function is available for XVR7X-I series only.
SMD, face detection, face recognition and IVS cannot be enabled simultaneously on select models.
5.11.3.1 SMD
The device can detect and classify humans and vehicles in the image.
5.11.3.1.1 Conguring SMD Parameters
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > SMD.
User's Manual
232
Figure 5-179 SMD
Step 2 In the Channel list, select a channel that you want to congure face detection function,
and then enable it.
Step 3 Set the sensitivity for smart motion detection, and then select human or motor vehicle or
both as the eective target.
Step 4 Congure the anti-dither time.
The anti-dither time is the period from the end of motion detection to the end of alarm
linkage action.
Step 5 Congure other parameters.
Table 5-51 Schedule and linkage parameters
Parameter Description
Schedule Dene a period during which the detection is active.
Alarm-out Port
Click Setting to congure the parameters.
●
General Alarm: Enable general alarm and select the alarm
output port.
●
External Alarm: Connect the alarm box to the Device and then
enable it.
●
Wireless Siren: Connect the wireless gateway to the Device and
then enable it.
When an alarm event occurs, the system links the peripheral
alarm devices connected to the selected output port.
Post-Alarm
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o alarm after
the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds
to 300 seconds. If you enter 0, there will be no delay.
User's Manual
233
Parameter Description
Show Message
Select the Show Message checkbox to enable a pop-up alarm
message in your local host PC.
Report Alarm
Select the Report Alarm checkbox to enable the system to
upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center)
when an alarm event occurs.
●
This function is available on select models.
●
The corresponding parameters in the alarm center should be
congured.
Send Email
Select the Send Email checkbox to enable the system to send an
email notication when an alarm event occurs.
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in
Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.
Record Channel
Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected
channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.
The recording for intelligence event and auto recording function
must be enabled.
PTZ Linkage
Click Setting to display the PTZ page.
To use this function, the PTZ operations must be congured.
Post Record
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o recording
after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to
300 seconds.
Tour
Select the Tour checkbox to enable a tour of the selected
channels.
●
To use this function, the tour setting must be congured.
●
After the tour is ended, the live view screen returns to the view
layout before tour started.
Picture Storage
Select the Picture Storage checkbox to take a snapshot of the
selected channel.
To use this function, make sure the snapshot function is enabled
for Intel in Main Menu > STORAGE > Schedule > Snapshot.
User's Manual
234
Parameter Description
Video Matrix
Select the checkbox to enable the function. When an alarm event
occurs, the video output port outputs the settings congured in
Main Menu > DISPLAY > TOUR > Extra Screen.
●
This function is available on select models.
●
The extra screen must be enabled to support this function.
Buzzer Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.
Log
Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a local alarm
log.
Alarm Tone
Select to enable audio broadcast in response to a face detection
event.
Warning Light
Select the checkbox to enable the warning light alarm of the
camera.
Siren Select the checkbox to enable the sound alarm of the camera.
Smart Illumination
Select the checkbox to enable the smart illumination of the
camera.
Step 6 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.11.3.1.2 Searching for SMD Reports
Background Information
You can search the detection history by channel, object type, and time.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > SMD.
Figure 5-180 SMD
Step 2 Select the channel, enter the start time and end time, and select the object type you need.
Step 3 Click Search.
The results are displayed.
5.11.3.2 Conguring IVS Function
The IVS function processes and analyzes the images to extract the key information to match with
the preset rules. When the detected behaviors match with the rules, the system activates alarms.
User's Manual
235
5.11.3.2.1 Conguring IVS Parameters
Background Information
The alarms are generated according to the congured parameters.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > IVS.
Figure 5-181 IVS
You can enable the AI Mode, and then the detection accuracy would be improved, but
the video stream quantity that the DVR can process will reduce.
Step 2 In the Channel list, select the channel number that you want to congure the IVS
function.
Step 3 Click Add.
Step 4 Congure the parameters for the rule that you selected. For details on the conguration
of the tripwire or intrusion rule, see "5.11.2.3.2 Conguring Tripwire Rules" and "5.11.2.3.3
Conguring Intrusion Rules".
Step 5 Select the checkbox of the rule to enable it.
Step 6 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.11.3.2.2 Smart Search for IVS Function
Background Information
You can search for the intelligent events and play back.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > AI Search > IVS.
User's Manual
236
Figure 5-182 IVS
Step 2 In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to search for the events, and then
set other parameters such as start time, end time, event type, and alarm object.
Step 3 Click Smart Search.
The results that satisfy the searching conditions are displayed.
Figure 5-183 Search results
Step 4 Click the picture that you want to play back.
User's Manual
237
Figure 5-184 Playback
Step 5 Click to play back the recorded video.
Double-click on the playing page to switch between full screen playing and thumbnail
playing.
You can also do the following operations to the recorded les.
●
To back up the recorded les to the external storage device, select les, click Backup ,
select the save path and le type, and then click Start.
Figure 5-185 Backup
●
To lock the les to make it unable to be overwritten, select the les, and then click
Lock.
●
To add a mark to the le, select the les and then click Add Tag.
User's Manual
238
5.11.3.3 Face Detection (For XVR5X-I and XVR7X-I series only)
Some series of devices can analyze the pictures captured by the camera to detect whether the faces
are on the pictures. You can search and lter the recorded videos the faces and play back. For
details, see "5.11.2.1 Face Detection".
If you select AI by device, then among face detection and recognition, IVS function, you can use one
of them at the same time for the same channel.
5.11.3.4 Face Recognition (For XVR7X-I series only)
Face recognition applies to AI preview mode and smart search. For details, see "5.11.2.2 Face
Recognition".
5.11.4 Conguring IVS Mode
For some models, you can switch the IVS function between general mode and advanced mode in
Main Menu > AI > Parameters > IVS. The advanced mode features higher detection accuracy
than the general mode but supports fewer channels for IVS. The function might vary depending on
the model.
Figure 5-186 IVS mode
User's Manual
239
5.11.5 Conguring Smart Schedule
Background Information
There are two modes for a channel to activate AI functions.
●
General mode: Only one AI function can be enabled for the designated channel during dierent
periods on each day in the week.
●
Schedule mode: The system can activate dierent AI functions for the designated channel
during dierent periods on each day in the week.
●
This section introduces how to enable the schedule mode.
Figure 5-187 Schedule mode
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > Parameters > Intelligent Mode.
Step 2 Select Schedule Mode.
The congurations of AI functions in the general mode and schedule mode are
independent. The changes you make in one mode does not aect the congurations in
the other mode.
User's Manual
240
Step 3 Select one channel and then click .
Step 4 Dene the periods for AI functions.
●
Dene the period by drawing.
a. Select the checkbox of AI function.
Figure 5-188 AI function
b. On the timeline, drag to dene a period.
You can set up to 6 periods for each day in the week. For each period, you can
enable an AI function.
●
Dene the period by editing.
a. Click
.
Figure 5-189 Period
b. Congure the time range for each period and then select the AI function to be
eective during each period.
You can select All to apply the settings to all the days in the week, or select specic
days that you want to apply the settings to.
c. Click OK.
Step 5 Click Apply.
5.12 IoT Function
5.12.1 Conguring Sensor Settings
You can connect external sensors wirelessly through the Device with USB gateway or through
connecting to a camera gateway. After connection, you can activate alarm events through external
sensors.
User's Manual
241
5.12.1.1 Connecting Sensor through Device
Only the Device with USB gateway supports this function.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > IoT > Management > Sensor Pairing.
Figure 5-190 Sensor pairing
Step 2 In the Access Type list, select USB Gateway.
Step 3 Click Add.
User's Manual
242
Figure 5-191 Add USB gateway
Step 4 Click Pair.
Figure 5-192 Pair
Step 5 Click Back to exit the pairing page.
Click to modify the sensor name; click to delete sensor information.
User's Manual
243
Figure 5-193 Sensor pairing
5.12.1.2 Connecting Sensor through Camera with Gateway
Only the camera with USB gateway supports this function.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > IoT > Management > Sensor Pairing.
User's Manual
244
Figure 5-194 Sensor pairing
Step 2 In the Access Type list, select Camera Gateway.
Step 3 In the Channel list, select the channel that is connected to the camera.
Step 4 Click Add.
Figure 5-195 Add camera gateway
Step 5 Click Pair.
The Device starts pairing with the sensor.
User's Manual
245
Figure 5-196 Pair
Step 6 Click Back to exit the pairing page.
Click to modify the sensor name; click to delete sensor information.
User's Manual
246
Figure 5-197 Sensor pairing
5.12.1.3 Conguring Alarm Linkage
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > IoT > Management > Wireless Detector.
User's Manual
247
Figure 5-198 Wireless detector
Step 2 In the Access Type list, select USB Gateway, Camera Gateway, or All.
When Access Type is Camera Gateway, you can select Channel to lter the status of
present wireless detector.
Step 3 Click .
Figure 5-199 Setting
Step 4 Congure the settings for alarm linkage.
Table 5-52 Alarm linkage settings
Parameter Description
Name Enter the customized alarm name.
User's Manual
248
Parameter Description
Schedule
Click Setting to congure the parameters.
Dene a period during which the motion detection is active. For
details, see "5.10.4.1.2 Setting Motion Detection Period".
PTZ Linkage
Click Setting to display the PTZ page.
Enable PTZ linkage actions, such as selecting the preset that you
want to be called when an alarm event occurs.
Alarm-out Port
Click Setting to congure the parameters.
●
Local Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm
devices connected to the selected output port.
●
Extension Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the
connected alarm box.
●
Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices
connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Post-Alarm
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o alarm after
the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds
to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Post Record
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o recording
after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to
300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Anti-Dither
Congure the time period from end of event detection to the stop
of alarm.
Record Channel
Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected
channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.
The recording for IoT alarms and auto recording function must be
enabled. For details, see "5.1.4.9 Conguring Recorded Video
Storage Schedule" and "5.9.1 Enabling Record Control".
Snapshot
Select the Snapshot checkbox to take a snapshot of the selected
channel.
To use this function, select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode >
Snapshot, in the Type list, select Event.
Tour
Select the Tour checkbox to enable a tour of the selected
channels.
Alarm Tone
Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a
local alarm event.
More Setting
●
Show Message: Select the Show Message checkbox to enable
a pop-up message in your local host PC.
●
Buzzer: Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the
Device.
User's Manual
249
Parameter Description
●
Video Matrix: Select the checkbox to enable the function.
When an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs
the settings congured in Main Menu > DISPLAY > Tour.
This function is available on select models.
●
Send Email: Enable the system to send an email notication
when an alarm event occurs.
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in
Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.
●
Log: Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a local
alarm log.
●
Extra screen: Select the checkbox to enable the function. When
an alarm event occurs, the extra screen outputs the settings
congured in Main Menu > DISPLAY > Tour > Sub Screen.
●
This function is available on select models.
●
To use this function, extra screen shall be enabled.
Step 5 Click OK to save the settings.
Step 6 On the Wireless Detector page, click Apply to complete the settings.
5.12.2 Conguring Temperature and Humidity Camera
You can view, search and export the temperature and humidity data of camera with such sensors
and congure the alarm event settings.
To use this function, please make sure there is at least one camera with temperature and humidity
sensor has been connected to the Device.
5.12.2.1 Enabling Detecting Function
Background Information
You should enable the IoT function the rst time when you enter this page.
Procedure
Step 1 On the main menu, select IoT > Management > Temperature/Humidity.
User's Manual
250
Figure 5-200 Temperature/Humidity
Step 2 Select the Enable checkbox to enable IoT function.
Figure 5-201 Enable
The Device starts detecting the temperature and humidity data from the camera and
display on the Realtime Display page.
Step 3 (Optional) Set temperature displaying mode.
When Show °F (Fahrenheit Degree) is selected, the temperature will be displayed by
Fahrenheit degree in Realtime Display tab.
5.12.2.2 Viewing Temperature and Humidity Data
You can view the temperature and humidity data on the Realtime Display page after the IoT
function is enabled.
In the Refresh Interval box, select data refresh interval. For example, you can select 5 Sec.
User's Manual
251
You can also display the temperature and humidity data in graphical way by selecting the Display
Chart checkbox.
Figure 5-202 Chart
Click Remove to delete the data.
5.12.2.3 Exporting Temperature and Humidity Data
Background Information
You can export the temperature and humidity data in .bmp format. This section uses exporting
humidity data as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Prepare a USB device and plug it into the Device.
Step 2 On the Realtime Display page, click the Humidity tab.
User's Manual
252
Figure 5-203 Humidity
Step 3 Click Lock to lock the data.
The export button is enabled.
Step 4 Click Export. The system starts exporting the data.
Step 5 Click OK.
You can nd the exported data on your USB device.
5.12.2.4 Conguring Alarm Linkage
You can congure alarm linkage settings for temperature and humidity data.
5.12.2.4.1 Conguring Alarm Linkage for Temperature Data
Procedure
Step 1 On the home page, select IoT > Management > Temperature/Humidity.
User's Manual
253
Figure 5-204 Temperature/Humidity
Step 2 On the temperature information line, click .
Figure 5-205 Setting
Step 3 Congure the settings for alarm linkage.
Table 5-53 Alarm linkage settings
Parameter Description
Access Point Indicates the channel that the camera is connected to.
Type Temperature by default.
Detect Position Name Set the detect position name.
Preview Channel
Select the channel that you want to preview to help monitor the
channel of access point. This channel could be the channel of
User's Manual
254
Parameter Description
access point or any other channels according to your actual
situation.
Event Type Select event type as High or Low, and set the upper and low
temperature limit respectively. For example, select event type as
High and set upper limit as 28, the alarm occurs when the
temperature reaches 28 °C.
Upper Limit
Enable Enable the alarm function.
Schedule
Click Setting to congure the parameters.
Dene a period during which the motion detection is active. For
details, see "5.10.4.1.2 Setting Motion Detection Period".
PTZ Linkage
Click Setting to display the PTZ page.
Enable PTZ linkage actions, such as selecting the preset that you
want to be called when an alarm event occurs.
Alarm-out Port
Click Setting to congure the parameters.
●
Local Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices
connected to the selected output port.
●
Extension Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the
connected alarm box.
●
Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices
connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Post-Alarm
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o alarm after
the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to
300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Post Record
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o recording
after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to
300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Anti-Dither
Congure the time period from end of event detection to the stop
of alarm.
Record Channel
Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected
channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.
The recording for IoT alarms and auto recording function must be
enabled. For details, see "5.1.4.9 Conguring Recorded Video
Storage Schedule" and "5.9.1 Enabling Record Control".
Snapshot
Select the Snapshot checkbox to take a snapshot of the selected
channel.
To use this function, select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode >
Snapshot, in the Type list, select Event.
Tour
Select the Tour checkbox to enable a tour of the selected
channels.
User's Manual
255
Parameter Description
Alarm Tone
Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a
local alarm event.
More Setting
●
Show Message: Select the Show Message checkbox to enable
a pop-up message in your local host PC.
●
Buzzer: Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the
Device.
●
Video Matrix: Select the checkbox to enable the function. When
an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs the
settings congured in Main Menu > DISPLAY > Tour.
This function is available on select models.
●
Send Email: Enable the system to send an email notication
when an alarm event occurs.
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in
Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.
●
Log: Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a local
alarm log.
●
Extra screen: Select the checkbox to enable the function. When
an alarm event occurs, the extra screen outputs the settings
congured in Main Menu > DISPLAY > Tour > Sub Screen.
●
This function is available on select models.
●
To use this function, extra screen shall be enabled.
Step 4 Click Save to save the settings.
5.12.2.4.2 Conguring Alarm Settings for Humidity Data
Background Information
You can congure the alarm event by setting the humidity data.
Procedure
Step 1 On the home page, select IoT > Management > Temperature/Humidity.
User's Manual
256
Figure 5-206 Temperature/Humidity
Step 2 On the humidity information line, click .
Figure 5-207 Setting
Step 3 Congure the settings for the following parameters.
Table 5-54 Alarm settings
Parameter Description
Access Point Indicates the channel that the camera is connected to.
Type Humidity by default.
Detect Position Name Set the detect position name.
Preview Channel
Select the channel that you want to preview to help monitor the
channel of access point. This channel could be the channel of
User's Manual
257
Parameter Description
access point or any other channels according to your actual
situation.
Event Type Select event type as High Humidity or Low Humidity, and set the
upper and low humidity limit respectively. For example, select
event type as High Humidity and set upper limit as 60, the alarm
occurs when the humidity reaches 60%RH.
Upper Limit
Enable Enable the alarm function.
Schedule
Click Setting to congure the parameters.
Dene a period during which the motion detection is active. For
details, see "5.10.4.1.2 Setting Motion Detection Period".
PTZ Linkage
Click Setting to display the PTZ page.
Enable PTZ linkage actions, such as selecting the preset that you
want to be called when an alarm event occurs.
Alarm-out Port
Click Setting to congure the parameters.
●
Local Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices
connected to the selected output port.
●
Extension Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the
connected alarm box.
●
Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices
connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Post-Alarm
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o alarm after
the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to
300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Post Record
Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning o recording
after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to
300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Anti-Dither
Congure the time period from end of event detection to the stop
of alarm.
Record Channel
Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected
channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.
The recording for IoT alarms and auto recording function must be
enabled. For details, see "5.1.4.9 Conguring Recorded Video
Storage Schedule" and "5.9.1 Enabling Record Control".
Snapshot
Select the Snapshot checkbox to take a snapshot of the selected
channel.
To use this function, select Main Menu > CAMERA > Encode >
Snapshot, in the Type list, select Event.
Tour
Select the Tour checkbox to enable a tour of the selected
channels.
User's Manual
258
Parameter Description
Alarm Tone
Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a
local alarm event.
More Setting
●
Show Message: Select the Show Message checkbox to enable
a pop-up message in your local host PC.
●
Buzzer: Select the checkbox to activate a buzzer noise at the
Device.
●
Video Matrix: Select the checkbox to enable the function. When
an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs the
settings congured in Main Menu > DISPLAY > Tour.
This function is available on select models.
●
Send Email: Enable the system to send an email notication
when an alarm event occurs.
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in
Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.
●
Log: Select the checkbox to enable the Device to record a local
alarm log.
Step 4 Click Save to save the settings.
5.12.2.5 Searching IoT Information
Background Information
You can search and backup all your IoT data.
To back up the data, you should prepare a USB device and plug it into the Device.
Procedure
Step 1 On the home page, select IoT > IOT Search.
User's Manual
259
Figure 5-208 IoT search
Step 2 Congure the parameters settings.
Table 5-55 IoT search parameters
Parameter Description
Access Point Indicates the channel that the camera is connected to.
Display Type In the Display Type list, select List or Diagram.
Type
Select the information type that you want to search. You
can select Humidity or Temperature.
Status
Select the information state that you want to search.
This option is available when you select List in the
Display Type list.
Start Time
Enter the start time and end time for the information that
you want to search.
End Time
Step 3 Click Search.
The system starts search according to your parameters settings. After searching is
nished, the result displays.
Click Goto to switch result pages.
User's Manual
260
Figure 5-209 List
Figure 5-210 Diagram
Step 4 Click Export. The system starts exporting the data.
Step 5 Click OK.
You can nd the exported data on your USB device.
User's Manual
261
5.12.3 Conguring Wireless Siren
Background Information
You can connect the wireless siren to the Device, when there is an alarm event activated on the
Device, the wireless siren generates alarms.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > IoT > Management > Wireless Siren.
Figure 5-211 Wireless siren
Step 2 Congure the settings for the wireless alarm output.
Table 5-56 Wireless alarm output parameters
Parameter Description
USB Gateway, Camera
Gateway
●
Auto : Automatically activate alarm if the alarm output
function for wireless siren is enabled for specic events.
●
Manual : Activate alarm immediately.
●
O : Do not activate alarm.
Alarm Release Click OK to clear all alarm output status of wireless siren.
Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.
5.13 POS
You can connect the Device to the POS (Point of Sale) machine and receive the information from it.
This function applies to the scenarios such as supermarket POS machine. After connection is
established, the Device can access the POS information and display the overlaid text in the channel
window.
User's Manual
262
Playing POS information in the local playback and viewing the POS information in the live view
screen only support single-channel mode and four-channel mode. Displaying monitoring screen
and playing back in the web support multi-channel mode.
5.13.1 Searching the Transaction Records
Background Information
The system supports fuzzy search.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > POS > POS Search.
Figure 5-212 POS search
Step 2 In the POS Search box, enter the information such as transaction number on your
receipt, amount, or product name.
Step 3 In the Start Time box and End Time box, enter the time period that you want to search
the POS transaction information.
Step 4 Click Search.
The searched transaction results display in the table.
User's Manual
263
5.13.2 Conguring POS Settings
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > POS > POS Setting.
Figure 5-213 POS setting
Step 2 Congure the settings for the POS parameters.
Table 5-57 POS parameters
Parameter Description
POS Name
In the POS Name list, select the POS machine that you want to
congure settings for. Click
to modify the POS name.
The POS name supports 21 Chinese characters or 63 English
characters.
Enable Enable the POS function.
Record Channel
Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected
channel(s) starts recording after an alarm occurs.
The recording for POS alarms and auto recording function must
be enabled. For details, see "5.1.4.9 Conguring Recorded Video
Storage Schedule" and "5.9.1 Enabling Record Control".
Privacy Enter the privacy content.
Protocol
Select POS by default. Dierent machine corresponds to
dierent protocol.
Connection Mode
In the Connect Type list, select the connection protocol type.
Click
, the IP Address page is displayed.
User's Manual
264
Parameter Description
In the Source IP box, enter the IP address (the machine that is
connected to the Device) that sends messages.
Character Encode Select a character encoding mode.
Overlay Mode
In the Overlay Mode list, Select Page or ROLL.
●
Page means to turn a page when there are 16 lines of overlay
information.
●
ROLL means to roll up the page when there are 16 lines of
overlay information. The rst line disappears each time.
When local preview mode is 4-split, overlay information is
substituted when there are 8 lines.
Network Timeout
When the network is not working correctly and cannot be
recovered after the entered timeout limit, the POS information
will not display normally. After the network is recovered, the
latest POS information will be displayed.
Overlay Time
Enter the time that how long you want to keep the POS
information displaying. For example, enter 5, the POS information
disappear from the screen after 5 seconds.
Font Size
In the Font Size list, select Small , Medium, or Large as the text
size of POS information
Font Color
In the color bar, click to select the color for the text size of POS
information.
POS Info
Enable the POS Info function, the POS information displays in the
live view screen.
Line Break
It does not need to congure. The system goes to a new line 1s
after no data is received.
If you enter a line delimiter, the system goes to a new line when
overlay information identies the line delimiter (hexadecimal).
For example, if line delimiter is F and overlay information is
123F6789, the local preview and web overlay information is
displayed as:
123
6789
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.14 Conguring Backup Settings
5.14.1 Finding USB Device
When you inset a USB storage device into the USB port of the Device, the Device detects the USB
storage device and pops up Find USB device page, which provides you a shortcut to perform
backup and upgrading operations.
User's Manual
265
For details, see "5.14.2 Backing up Files", "5.21.3 Viewing Event Information", "5.20.4 Exporting and
Importing System Settings", and "5.20.6 Updating the Device".
Figure 5-214 Backup device
5.14.2 Backing up Files
You can back up the recorded videos and snapshots.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > Backup.
Figure 5-215 Backup
Step 2 Congure the settings for the backup parameters.
User's Manual
266
Table 5-58 Backup parameters
Parameter Description
Device Name
In the Device Name list, select the device that you want to back up
the les to.
Format
Click Format.
●
If the capacity of external storage device is less than 2 TB, you
can select FAT32 or NTFS to format it.
●
If the capacity of external storage device is equal to or more than
2 TB, you can only select NTFS to format it.
Path
Click Browse. Select the route where you want to search for the
les.
Record Channel
In the Record Channel list, select the channel where you want to
search for the les.
Type In the Type list, select the le type that you want to search.
Start Time
Enter the start time and end time for the les that you want to
search.
End Time
File Format
In the File Format list, select the le format as DAV or MP4 that
you want to search.
Step 3 Click Search to search the les that meet the congured settings.
The searched results will display in the table.
Step 4 Select the les that you want to back up.
Step 5 Click Backup to back up the selected les to the congured path.
Click Remove to remove all the searched results.
The system will display a backup progress bar. A dialog box will be prompted when
backup is completed.
User's Manual
267
Figure 5-216 Browse
Step 6 Click OK.
5.15 Network Management
5.15.1 Conguring Network Settings
You can ensure the network interworking between the Device and other devices through
conguring the network settings.
5.15.1.1 Conguring TCP/IP Settings
Select Main Menu > NETWORK > TCP/IP, and then you can congure the settings for the Device
such as IP address, DNS according to the networking plan. For details, see "5.1.4.4 Conguring
Network Settings".
5.15.1.2 Conguring Port Settings
Background Information
You can congure the maximum connection accessing the Device from Client such as web
interface, platform, and mobile client and congure each port settings.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Port.
User's Manual
268
Figure 5-217 Port
Step 2 Congure the settings for the connection parameters.
Table 5-59 Connection parameters
Parameter Description
Max Connection
The allowable maximum clients accessing the Device at the same time,
such as WEB, Platform, and Mobile Phone.
Select a value between 1 and 128. The default value setting is 128.
TCP Port
The default value setting is 37777. You can enter the value according
to your actual situation.
UDP Port
The default value setting is 37778. You can enter the value according
to your actual situation.
HTTP Port
The default value setting is 80. You can enter the value according to
your actual situation.
If you enter other value, for example, 70, and then you should enter 70
after the IP address when logging in the Device by browser.
RTSP Port
The default value setting is 554. You can enter the value according to
your actual situation.
POS Port
Data transmission. The value range is from 1 through 65535. The
default value is 38800.
NTP Server Port
The default value setting is 123. You can enter the value according to
your actual situation.
HTTPS Port
HTTPS communication port. The default value setting is 443. You can
enter the value according to your actual situation.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
User's Manual
269
5.15.1.3 Conguring Wi-Fi Connection Settings
You can make wireless connection between the Device and the other devices in the same network
through Wi-Fi settings, facilitating the devices connection and mobility.
Only the Device with Wi-Fi module supports this function.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Wi-Fi.
Figure 5-218 Wi-Fi (1)
User's Manual
270
Figure 5-219 Wi-Fi (2)
Step 2 Congure the settings for the Wi-Fi connection parameters.
Table 5-60 Wi-Fi connection parameters
Parameter Description
Connect Automatically
Enable Connect Automatically.
After the Device is restarted, it will automatically connect to
the nearest hotspot that had been connected successfully.
Refresh
Refresh the hotspot list. The self-adaption function such as
adding password is supported if such setting was once
congured.
Connect
In the hotpots list, select a hotspot, and then click Connect.
●
To reconnect the same hotspot, disconnect rst and then
reconnect.
●
To connect to other hotspot, disconnect from the current
connected hotspot rst, and then connect to the other
hotspot.
Disconnect To disconnect from a hotspot, click Disconnect.
Step 3 (Optional) Click Firmware Update, select related rmware le, and then click OK.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.
After the Device is connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot, in the Wi-Fi Info area, the current
hotspot, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway are displayed.
5.15.1.4 Conguring 3G/4G Settings
User's Manual
271
5.15.1.4.1 Through the Wireless 3G/4G Module
You can connect a wireless 3G/4G module to the USB port of the Device and then access the Device
with the IP address provided by the module.
This function is available on select models.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the wireless 3G/4G module to the USB port of the Device.
Step 2 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > 3G/4G.
Figure 5-220 3G/4G
The 3G/4G page consists of three areas:
●
Area 1: Displays the signal strength.
●
Area 2: Displays the module congurations.
●
Area 3: Displays the connection state.
The information of Area 2 will display after the 3G/4G module is connected; while the
information of Area 1 and Area 3 will display only after the 3G/4G function is enabled.
Step 3 The Device starts identifying the wireless module and displays the recognized
information for the parameters in Area 2.
Table 5-61 Recognized information
Parameter Description
NIC Name Displays the name of Ethernet card.
User's Manual
272
Parameter Description
Network Type
Displays the network type. Dierent type represents
dierent supplier.
APN Displays the default APN number.
Dial-up No. Displays the default dial No.
Authentication Type
Authentication mode. You can select PAP , CHAP, or
NO_AUTH.
Username, Password
Enter the username and password for
authentication.
Step 4 Select the Enable checkbox.
Step 5 Click Dial to start connecting.
After the connection is established, the result is displayed in the Wireless Network area.
Figure 5-221 Wireless network
Step 6 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.15.1.4.2 Through the External Drive
You can connect the 3G/4G through an external drive.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the external drive to the USB port of the Device.
Step 2 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > 3G/4G.
User's Manual
273
5.15.1.5 Conguring PPPoE Settings
Background Information
PPPoE is another way for the Device to access the network. You can establish network connection
by conguring PPPoE settings to give the Device a dynamic IP address in the WAN. To use this
function, rstly you need to obtain the username and password from the Internet Service Provider.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > PPPoE.
Figure 5-224 PPPoE
Step 2 Enable the PPPoE function.
Step 3 In the Username box and Password box, enter the username and password accordingly
provided by the Internet Service Provider.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.
The system pops up a message to indicate the successfully saved. The IP address appears
on the PPPoE page. You can use this IP address to access the Device.
When the PPPoE function is enabled, the IP address on the TCP/IP page cannot be
modied.
5.15.1.6 Conguring DDNS Settings
When the IP address of the Device changes frequently, the DDNS function can dynamically refresh
the correspondence between the domain on DNS and the IP address, ensuring you access the
Device by using the domain.
Prerequisites
Conrm if the Device supports the DDNS Type and log in the website provided by the DDNS service
provider to register the information such as domain from PC located in the WAN.
User's Manual
275
After you have registered and logged in the DDNS website successfully, you can view the
information of all the connected devices under this username.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > DDNS.
Figure 5-225 DDNS
Step 2 Congure the settings for the DDNS parameters.
Table 5-62 DDNS parameters
Parameter Description
Enable
Enable the DDNS function.
After enabling DDNS function, the third-party might collect your
Device information.
Type
Type and address of DDNS service provider.
●
Type: Dyndns DDNS; address: members.dyndns.org
●
Type: NO-IP DDNS; address: dynupdate.no-ip.com
●
Type: CN99 DDNS; address: members.3322.org
Server Address
Domain Name
The domain name for registering on the website of DDNS
service provider.
Username Enter the username and password obtained from DDNS service
provider. You need to register (including username and
password) on the website of DDNS service provider.
Password
User's Manual
276
Parameter Description
Interval Enter the amount of time that you want to update the DDNS.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
Enter the domain name in the browser on your PC, and then press Enter.
If the web page of the Device is displayed, the conguration is successful. If not, the
conguration is failed.
5.15.1.7 Conguring Email Settings
Background Information
You can congure the email settings to enable the system to send the email as a notication when
there occurs an alarm event.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.
Figure 5-226 Email
Step 2 Congure the settings for the email parameters.
Table 5-63 Email parameters
Parameter Description
Enable Enable the email function.
User's Manual
277
Parameter Description
There might be risk of sending data to specied email address
after it is enabled.
SMTP Server Enter the address of SMTP server of sender’s email account.
Port
Enter the port value of SMTP server. The default value is 25. You
can enter the value according to your actual need.
Username
Enter the username and password of sender’s email account.
Password
Anonymous If enable the anonymity function, you can login as anonymity.
Receiver
In the Receiver list, select the number of receiver that you want
to receive the notication. The Device supports up to three mail
receivers.
Email Address Enter the email address of mail receiver(s).
Sender
Enter the sender’s email address. It supports maximum three
senders separated by comma.
Subject
Enter the email subject.
Supports Chinese, English and numerals. It supports maximum 64
characters.
Attachment
Enable the attachment function. When there is an alarm event,
the system can attach snapshots as an attachment to the email.
3 Images
Enable the 3 Images function. The system captures 3 images as
attached images for the main text.
Interval The interval that the system sends every 3 image.
Encryption Type
Select the encryption type: NONE , SSL, or TLS.
For SMTP server, the default encryption type is TLS.
Sending Interval (sec.)
This is the interval that the system sends an email for the same
type of alarm event, which means, the system does not send an
email upon any alarm event.
This setting helps to avoid the large amount of emails caused by
frequent alarm events.
The value ranges from 0 to 3600. 0 means that there is no interval.
Health Mail
Enable the health test function. The system can send a test email
to check the connection.
Sending Interval (Min.)
This is the interval that the system sends a health test email.
The value ranges from 30 to 1440. 0 means that there is no
interval.
Test
Click Test to test the email sending function. If the conguration
is correct, the receiver’s email account will receive the email.
User's Manual
278
Parameter Description
Before testing, click Apply to save the settings.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.15.1.8 Conguring UPnP Settings
You can map the relationship between the LAN and the WAN to access the Device on the LAN
through the IP address on the WAN.
Prerequisites
●
Log in to the router to set the WAN port to enable the IP address to connect into the WAN.
●
Enable the UPnP function at the router.
●
Connect the Device with the LAN port on the router to connect into the LAN.
●
Select Main Menu > NETWORK > TCP/IP, congure the IP address into the router IP address
range, or enable the DHCP function to obtain an IP address automatically.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > UPnP.
Figure 5-227 UPnP
Step 2 Congure the settings for the UPnP parameters.
Table 5-64 UPnP parameters
Parameter Description
Port Mapping Enable the UPnP function.
User's Manual
279
Parameter Description
After it is enabled, the intranet services and ports shall be mapped
to extranet, proceed with caution.
Status
Indicates the status of UPnP function.
●
Oine: Failed.
●
Online: Succeeded.
LAN IP
Enter IP address of router on the LAN.
After mapping succeeded, the system obtains IP address
automatically without performing any congurations.
WAN IP
Enter IP address of router on the WAN.
After mapping succeeded, the system obtains IP address
automatically without performing any congurations.
Port Mapping List
The settings in PAT table correspond to the UPnP PAT table on the
router.
●
Service Name: Name of network server.
●
Protocol: Type of protocol.
●
Int. Port: Internal port that is mapped on the Device.
●
Ext. Port: External port that is mapped on the router.
●
To avoid the conict, when setting the external port, try to use
the ports from 1024 through 5000 and avoid popular ports
from 1 through 255 and system ports from 256 through 1023.
●
When there are several devices in the LAN, reasonably arrange
the ports mapping to avoid mapping to the same external port.
●
When establishing a mapping relationship, ensure the mapping
ports are not occupied or limited.
●
The internal and external ports of TCP and UDP must be the
same and cannot be modied.
●
Click
to modify the external port.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
In the browser, enter http://WAN IP: External IP port. You can visit the LAN Device.
User's Manual
280
5.15.1.9 Conguring SNMP Settings
You can connect the Device with some software such as MIB Builder and MG-SOFT MIB Browser to
manage and control the Device from the software. This function is available on select models.
Prerequisites
●
Install the software that can manage and control the SNMP, such as MIB Builder and MG-SOFT
MIB Browser
●
Obtain the MIB les that correspond to the current version from the technical support.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > SNMP.
Figure 5-228 SNMP
Step 2 Congure the settings for the SNMP parameters.
Table 5-65 SNMP parameters
Parameter Description
Enable Enable the SNMP function.
Version
Select the checkbox of SNMP version(s) that you are using.
The default version is V3. There is a risk of select V1 or V2.
SNMP Port Indicates the monitoring port on the agent program.
Read Community
Indicates the read/write strings supported by the agent program.
Write Community
User's Manual
281
Parameter Description
Trap Address
Indicates the destination address for the agent program to send
the Trap information.
Trap Port
Indicates the destination port for the agent program to send the
Trap information.
Read-Only Username
Enter the username that is allowed to access the Device and has
the "Read Only" permission.
Read/Write Username
Enter the username that is allowed to access the Device and has
the "Read and Write" permission.
Authentication Type Includes MD5 and SHA. The system recognizes automatically.
Authentication Password
Enter the password for authentication type and encryption type.
The password should be no less than eight characters.
Encryption Password
Encryption Type
In the Encryption Type list, select an encryption type. The default
setting is CBC-DES.
Step 3 Compile the two MIB les by MIB Builder.
Step 4 Run MG-SOFT MIB Browser to load in the module from compilation.
Step 5 On the MG-SOFT MIB Browser, enter the Device IP that you want to manage, and then
select the version number to query.
Step 6 On the MG-SOFT MIB Browser, unfold the tree-structured directory to obtain the
congurations of the Device, such as the channels quantity and software version.
5.15.1.10 Conguring Multicast Settings
Background Information
When you access the Device from the network to view the video, if the access is exceeded, the
video will not display. You can use the multicast function to group the IP to solve the problem.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Multicast.
User's Manual
282
Figure 5-229 Multicast
Step 2 Congure the settings for the multicast parameters.
Table 5-66 Multicast parameters
Parameter Description
Enable Enable the multicast function.
IP Address
Enter the IP address that you want to use as the multicast
IP.
The IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 through
239.255.255.255.
Port
Enter the port for the multicast. The port ranges from 1025
through 65000.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
You can use the multicast IP address to log in to the web.
On the web login dialog box, in the Type list, select MULTICAST. The web will
automatically obtain the multicast IP address and join. Then you can view the video
through multicast function.
User's Manual
283
Figure 5-230 Login
5.15.1.11 Conguring Register Settings
Background Information
You can register the Device into the specied proxy server which acts as the transit to make it easier
for the client software to access the Device.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Register.
Figure 5-231 Register
User's Manual
284
Step 2 Congure the settings for the register parameters.
Table 5-67 Register parameters
Parameter Description
Enable Enable the register function.
No. The default value is 1.
Server IP Address
Enter the server IP address or the server domain that you
want to register to.
Port Enter the port of the server.
Sub Service ID This ID is allocated by the server and used for the Device.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.15.1.12 Conguring Alarm Center Settings
You can congure the alarm center server to receive the uploaded alarm information. To use this
function, the Report Alarm checkbox must be selected. For details about alarm event settings, see
"5.10 Alarm Events Settings".
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > Alarm Center.
Figure 5-232 Alarm center
Step 2 Congure the settings for the alarm center parameters.
Table 5-68 Alarm center parameters
Parameter
Description
Enable Enable the alarm center function.
User's Manual
285
Parameter Description
Protocol Type
In the Protocol Type list, select protocol type. The default is
ALARM CENTER.
Server Address
The IP address and communication port of the PC installed
with alarm client.
Port
Auto Report Plan
In the Auto Report Plan list, select time cycle and specic time
for uploading alarm.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.15.1.13 Conguring P2P Settings
You can manage the devices by using P2P technology to download the application and register the
devices. For details, see "5.1.4.5 Conguring P2P Settings".
5.15.2 Conguring Network Testing Settings
5.15.2.1 Testing the Network
You can test the network connection status between the Device and other devices.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Network > Test.
Figure 5-233 Network test
Step 2 In the Destination IP box, enter the IP address.
Step 3 Click Test.
After testing is completed, the test result is displayed. You can check the evaluation for
average delay, packet loss, and network status.
User's Manual
286
Figure 5-234 Test result
5.15.2.2 Capturing Packet and Backing up
Background Information
Packet capture means the operations such as capturing, resending, and editing data that are sent
and received during network transmission. When there is network abnormality, you can perform
packet capturing and back up into the USB storage device. This date can be provided to the
technical support for analyzing the network condition.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Network > Test.
User's Manual
287
Figure 5-235 Test
Step 2 Connect a USB storage device to the Device.
Step 3 Click Refresh.
The Device starts detecting the USB storage device and displays its name in the Device
Name box.
Step 4 Select the route of the data that you want to capture and back up.
1. In the Packet Snier Backup area, click Browse.
Figure 5-236 Browse
2. Select the route.
User's Manual
288
●
If there are several USB storage devices are connected to the Device, you can select
from the Device Name list.
●
Click Refresh to total space, free space and the le list in the selected USB storage
device.
●
In the case of insucient capacity, click
to delete the needless les.
●
Click New Folder to create a new folder in the USB storage device.
3. Click OK to save the route selection settings.
Step 5 Click to start packet capturing and backing up.
●
Only the data packet of one LAN can be captured at one time.
●
After capturing starts, you can exit the Test page to perform other operations such as
web login and monitoring.
Step 6 Click to stop capturing.
The backup data is saved in the selected route under the naming style "LAN name-
time.pcap". You can open it by using Wireshark software.
Figure 5-237 Backup data
5.16 Conguring Account Settings
You can add, modify and delete user accounts, groups, and ONVIF users, and set security questions
for admin account.
●
The username supports 31 characters and group name supports 15 characters. The username
can be consisted of letter, number, "_", "@", ""..
User's Manual
289
●
You can set maximum 64 users and 20 groups. The group name by "User" and "Admin" cannot
be deleted. You can set other groups and dene the relevant permissions. However, the admin
account cannot be set randomly.
●
You can manage the account by user and group and the name cannot be repeated. Every user
must belong to a group, and one user only belongs to one group.
5.16.1 Conguring User Account
5.16.1.1 Adding a User Account
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > User.
Figure 5-238 User
Step 2 Click Add.
User's Manual
290
Figure 5-239 Add user
Step 3 Congure the settings for the parameters of adding a user account.
Table 5-69 Parameters of adding user
Parameter Description
Username
Enter a username and password for the account.
Password
Conrm Password Re-enter the password.
Remarks
Optional.
Enter a description of the account.
User MAC Enter user MAC address.
Group
Select a group for the account.
The user rights must be within the group permission.
Period
Click Setting to congure the parameters.
Dene a period during which the new account can log in to the
device. The new account cannot log in to the device during the
time beyond the set period.
Password Expires in Set the password validity period.
Permission
In the Permission area, select the checkboxes in the System
tab, Playback tab, and Monitor tab.
User's Manual
291
Parameter Description
To manage the user account easily, when dening the user
account authority, it is recommended not to give the authority
to the common user account higher that the advanced user
account.
Step 4 Click OK to complete the settings.
Related Operations
Set the permitted period.
1. Next to Period , click Setting.
Figure 5-240 Setting
2. Dene the permitted period. By default, it is active all the time.
●
Dene the period by drawing.
Dene for a specied day of a week: On the timeline, click the half-hour blocks to select
the active period.
Dene for several days of a week: Click before each day, the icon switches to . On
the timeline of any selected day, click the half-hour blocks to select the active periods, all
the days with will take the same settings.
Dene for all days of a week: Click All, all the switches to . On the timeline of any
day, click the half-hour blocks to select the active periods, all the days will take the same
settings.
●
Dene the period by editing.
a. Click
.
User's Manual
292
Figure 5-241 Period
b. Enter the time frame for the period and select the checkbox to enable the settings.
There are six periods for you to set for each day.
Under Copy , select All to apply the settings to all the days of a week, or select specic
day(s) that you want to apply the settings to.
c. Click OK to save the settings.
3. Click OK.
5.16.1.2 Modifying a User Account
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > User.
Figure 5-242 User
User's Manual
293
Step 2 Click for the user account that you want to modify.
Figure 5-243 Modify
Step 3 Change the settings for password, username, user group, user MAC, memo, password
validity period and authority.
The new password can be set from 8 digits through 32 digits and contains at least two
types from number, letter and special characters (excluding"'", """, ";", ":" and "&").
For the admin account, you enable/disable the unlock pattern and modify password hint.
●
To use the unlock pattern, enable Unlock Pattern , click
, draw a pattern in the
Unlock Pattern page, and then click Save to save the setting.
●
Enter password hint text in Password Hint box.
Step 4 Click OK to complete the settings.
5.16.1.3 Deleting a User Account
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > User.
User's Manual
294
Figure 5-244 User
Step 2 Click for the user account that you want to delete.
Step 3 Click OK to delete a user account.
5.16.2 Conguring Group Account
5.16.2.1 Adding a Group
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > Group.
User's Manual
295
Figure 5-245 Group
Step 2 Click Add.
Figure 5-246 Add group
Step 3 Congure the settings for the parameters of adding a group.
Table 5-70 Parameters of adding a group
Parameter Description
Group Name Enter a name for the group.
Remarks
Optional.
Enter a description of the account.
Permission
In the Permission area, select the checkboxes in the System
tab, Playback tab, and Monitor tab.
User's Manual
296
Step 4 Click OK to complete the settings.
5.16.2.2 Modifying a Group
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > Group.
Figure 5-247 Group
Step 2 Click for the group account that you want to modify.
Figure 5-248 Modify
Step 3 Change the settings for group name, memo, and authority.
Step 4 Click OK to complete the settings.
User's Manual
297
5.16.2.3 Deleting a Group
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > Group.
Figure 5-249 Group
Step 2 Click for the user account that you want to delete.
Step 3 Click OK to delete a group.
5.16.3 Conguring ONVIF Users
Background Information
The device manufactured by other company can connect to the Device through ONVIF protocol by
an authorized ONVIF account.
The admin account is created for ONVIF users right after the Device has been initialized.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > ONVIF User.
User's Manual
298
Figure 5-250 ONVIF user
Step 2 Click Add.
Figure 5-251 Add ONVIF user
Step 3 Enter username, password, and select the group that you want this account to belong to.
Step 4 Click OK to save the settings.
Click to modify the account; Click to delete the account.
5.17 Audio Management
Audio management function manages audio les and congures the playing schedule. When there
is an alarm event, the audio le can be activated.
User's Manual
299
5.17.1 Conguring Audio Files
Background Information
You can add audio les, listen to audio les, rename and delete audio les, and congure the audio
volume.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AUDIO > File Management.
Figure 5-252 File management
Step 2 Click Add.
User's Manual
300
Figure 5-253 Add le
Step 3 Select the audio les that you want to import.
Step 4 Click OK to start importing audio les from the USB storage device.
Step 5 If the importing is successful, the audio les will display in the File Management page.
Figure 5-254 Imported le
The imported audio les are automatically saved into the HDD, so you do not need to
connect to the USB storage device to get the le next time.
●
Click
to play the audio le.
●
Click
to rename the audio le.
●
Click
to delete the audio le.
●
To decrease or increase the playing volume, move the slider to the left or to the right.
5.17.2 Conguring Playing Schedule for Audio Files
Background Information
You can congure the settings to play the audio les during the dened time period.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > AUDIO > Audio Play.
User's Manual
301
Figure 5-255 Audio play
Step 2 Congure the settings for the schedule parameters.
Table 5-71 Schedule parameters
Parameter Description
Period
In the Period box, enter the time. Select the checkbox to enable
the settings.
You can congure up to six periods.
File Name
In the File Name list, select the audio le that you want to play
for this congured period.
Interval
In the Interval box, enter the time in minutes for how often you
want to repeat the playing.
Repeat
Congure how many times you want to repeat the playing in the
dened period.
Output Port
Includes two options: MIC and Audio. It is MIC by default. The
MIC function shares the same port with talkback function and
the latter has the priority.
●
The nish time for audio playing is decided by audio le size and the congured
interval.
●
Playing priority: Alarm event > Talkback > Audio le > Trial listening.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.18 Storage Management
Storage management function manages the stored resources such as recorded video les and
storage space. The function aims at providing easier operation and improving the storage
eciency.
5.18.1 Conguring Basic Settings
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Basic.
User's Manual
302
Figure 5-256 Basic
Step 2 Congure the settings for the basic settings parameters.
Table 5-72 Basic settings parameters
Parameter Description
Disk Full
Congure the settings for the situation all the read/write discs
are full.
●
Select Stop to stop recording.
●
Select Overwrite to overwrite the recorded video les always
from the earliest time.
Create Video Files
Congure the time length and le length for each recorded
video.
Delete Expired Files
Congure whether to delete the old les and if yes, congure the
days.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.18.2 Conguring the Recording and Snapshot Schedule
The system starts recording and taking snapshot according to the congured schedule. For details,
see "5.1.4.9 Conguring Recorded Video Storage Schedule" and "5.1.4.10 Conguring Snapshot
Storage Schedule".
User's Manual
303
5.18.3 Conguring Disk Manager
Background Information
You can view the HDD information, format HDD, and congure the HDD type through HDD
manager.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Disk Manager.
In the table, you can view the information of current HDD, such as device name, HDD
type, status, total space and free space, and serial number of the HDD port.
Figure 5-257 Disk manager
Step 2 Conguring the settings for the HDD manager.
●
HDD type setting: In the Properties list, select Read/Write, Read Only, and then click
Apply to save the settings.
●
HDD format: Select the HDD that you want to format, click Format , and enable Clear
HDD database in the pop-up message, click OK and enter the password of admin user
in the prompted dialog box, click OK and then following the on-screen instructions to
complete formatting.
●
Formatting HDD will erase all data on the disk, proceed with caution.
User's Manual
304
Figure 5-258 Note
5.18.4 Conguring Record
Record type includes auto and manual record. You can congure record type of main stream and
sub stream. See "5.7 Conguring Record Settings".
5.18.5 Conguring Advance Settings
Background Information
Create HDD group, and save main stream, sub stream and snapshot of designated channels to the
HDD group.
●
If the page prompts that the current HDD mode is quota group, click Switch to Disk Group
Mode, and then congure HDD group.
●
You can enable either HDD Group Mode or Quota Group. The system prompts to reboot the
device each time when you switch the mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Disk Group > Disk Group.
User's Manual
305
Figure 5-259 Disk group
Step 2 Select group for each HDD, and then click Apply to complete the settings.
Step 3 After conguring HDD group, click Main Stream , Sub Stream and Snapshot tabs
respectively, to congure the saving of main stream, sub stream and snapshot
information of dierent channels to dierent HDD groups.
User's Manual
306
Figure 5-260 Main stream
Figure 5-261 Sub stream
User's Manual
307
Figure 5-262 Snapshot
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.18.6 Conguring Disk Quota
Background Information
By conguring quota, allocate xed storage capacity to each channel, and distribute the storage
space of each channel reasonably.
●
If the page displays that Disk group mode selected , click Switch to Quota Mode, and then
congure quota.
●
You can enable either HDD Group Mode or Quota Group. The system prompts to restart the
device each time when you switch the mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Disk Quota.
Step 2 Congure the disk quota.
●
For one-HDD devices, click
, select a channel and then congure the
parameters including recording duration, bit rate, storage capacity of pictures.
User's Manual
308
Figure 5-263 Disk quota (one-HDD device)
●
For devices that support 2 or more HDDs, you can switch the quota mode between
version 1 and version 2.
V1 : Select a channel and then congure the disk quota for each disk.
V2 : Select a channel and then congure the parameters including recording
duration, bit rate, storage capacity of pictures.
User's Manual
309
Figure 5-264 Version 1
Figure 5-265 Version 2
Step 3 Click Apply.
User's Manual
310
5.18.7 Conguring HDD Detecting Settings
This function is available on select models.
HDD detecting function detects the current status of HDD to let you know the HDD performance
and replace the defective HDD.
5.18.7.1 Checking HDD
Background Information
You can detect HDD by key area detect and global detect.
●
Key area detect: Detect the les saved in HDD. The detected bad track can be repaired by
formatting. If there are no les in HDD, the system cannot detect the bad track.
●
Global detect: Detect the whole HDD through Windows, which takes time and might aect the
HDD that is recording the video.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Disk Check > Manual Check.
Figure 5-266 Manual check
Step 2 In the Type list, select Key Area Detect or Global Check; and in the Disk list, select the
HDD that you want to detect.
Step 3 Click Start Check.
The system starts detecting the HDD.
During detecting, click Pause to pause detecting, click Continue to restart detecting, and
click Stop Detect to stop detecting.
User's Manual
311
Figure 5-267 Start check
5.18.7.2 View Detecting Results
Background Information
After the detecting is completed, you can view the detecting reports to nd out the problem and
replace the defective HDD to avoid data loss.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Disk Check > Check Report.
Figure 5-268 Check report
Step 2 Click .
You can view detecting results and S.M.A.R.T reports.
User's Manual
312
Figure 5-269 Results
Figure 5-270 S.M.A.R.T
5.18.8 Conguring Record Estimate
Background Information
Record estimate function can calculate how long you can record video according to the HDD
capacity, and calculate the required HDD capacity according to the record period.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > Rec Estimate.
User's Manual
313
Figure 5-271 Rec estimate
Step 2 Click .
You can congure the resolution, frame rate, bit rate and record time for the selected
channel.
Step 3 Click OK to save the settings.
Then the system will calculate the time period that can be used for storage according to
the channels settings and HDD capacity.
Click Copy to to copy the settings to other channels.
Related Operations
●
Calculate recording time.
1. On the Rec Estimate page, click the By Space tab.
Figure 5-272 By space
2. Click Select.
3. Select the checkbox of the HDD that you want to calculate.
In the By Time tab, in the Time box, the recording time is displayed.
User's Manual
314
Figure 5-273 By time
●
Calculate HDD capacity for storage.
1. On the Rec Estimate page, click the By Time tab.
Figure 5-274 By time
2. In the Time box, enter the time period that you want to record.
In the Total Space box, the required HDD capacity is displayed.
Figure 5-275 Total space
5.18.9 Conguring FTP Storage Settings
You can store and view the recorded videos and snapshots on the FTP server.
Prerequisites
Purchase or download a FTP server and install it on your PC.
For the created FTP user, you need to set the write permission; otherwise the upload of recorded
videos and snapshots might be failed.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > FTP.
User's Manual
315
Figure 5-276 FTP
Step 2 Congure the settings for the FTP settings parameters.
Table 5-73 FTP settings parameters
Parameter Description
Enable Enable the FTP upload function.
FTP type
●
FTP: Plaintext transmission.
●
SFTP: Encrypted transmission (recommended)
Server Address IP address of FTP server.
Port
●
FTP: The default is 21.
●
SFTP: The default is 22.
Anonymous
Enter the username and password to log in to the FTP server.
Enable the anonymity function, and then you can login
anonymously without entering the username and password.
Username
Password
Storage Path
Create folder on FTP server.
●
If you do not enter the name of remote directory, system
automatically creates the folders according to the IP and
time.
●
If you enter the name of remote directory, the system creates
the folder with the entered name under the FTP root
directory rst, and then automatically creates the folders
according to the IP and time.
User's Manual
316
Parameter Description
File Size
Enter the length of the uploaded recorded video.
●
If the entered length is less than the recorded video length,
only a section of the recorded video can be uploaded.
●
If the entered length is more than the recorded video length,
the whole recorded video can be uploaded.
●
If the entered length is 0, the whole recorded video will be
uploaded.
Picture Upload Interval (Sec.)
●
If this interval is longer than snapshot interval, the system
takes the recent snapshot to upload. For example, the
interval is 5 seconds, and snapshot interval is 2 seconds per
snapshot, the system uploads the recent snapshot every 5
seconds.
●
If this interval is shorter than snapshot interval, the system
uploads the snapshot per the snapshot interval. For example,
the interval is 5 seconds, and snapshot interval is 10 seconds
per snapshot, the system uploads the snapshot every 10
seconds.
●
To congure the snapshot interval, select Main Menu >
CAMERA > Encode > Snapshot.
Channel Select the channel that you want to apply the FTP settings.
Day Select the week day and set the time period that you want to
upload the recorded les. You can set two periods for each week
day.
Period 1, Period 2
Record type
Select the record type (Alarm, Intel, MD, and General) that you
want to upload. The selected record type will be uploaded
during the congured time period.
Step 3 Click Test.
The system pops up a message to indicate success or failure. If failed, check the network
connection or congurations.
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.19 Security Center
You can set security options to strengthen device security and use the device in a much safer way.
5.19.1 Security Status
Security scanning helps get a whole picture of device security status. You can scan user, service and
security module status for detailed information about the security status of the device.
Detecting User and Service
Green icon represents a healthy status of the scanned item, and orange icon represents a risky
status.
User's Manual
317
●
Login authentication: When there’s a risk in the login authentication, the icon will be in orange
to warn risk. You can click Details to see the detailed risk description.
●
Conguration Security: When there’s a risk in the device conguration, the icon will be in orange
to warn risk. You can click Details to see the detailed risk description.
Figure 5-277 Security status
Scanning Security Modules
This area shows the running status of security modules. For details about the security modules,
move mouse pointer on the icon to see the on-screen instructions.
Scanning Security Status
You can click Rescan to scan security status.
5.19.2 System Service
You can set DVR basic information such as basic services, 802.1x and HTTPS.
5.19.2.1 Basic Services
Procedure
Step 1 Select SECURITY > Main Menu > System Service > Basic Services.
User's Manual
318
Figure 5-278 Basic services
Step 2 Select Basic Services and congure parameters.
There might be safety risk when Mobile Push Notications , CGI, ONVIF, SSH and NTP
Server is enabled.
Table 5-74 Basic services parameters
Parameter Description
Mobile Push Notications
After enabling this function, the alarm triggered by the Device can
be pushed to a mobile phone. This function is enabled by default.
There might be safety risk if this service is enabled. Disable this
function when it is not in use.
CGI
If this function is enabled, the remote devices can be added through
the CGI protocol. This function is enabled by default.
There might be safety risk if this service is enabled. Disable this
function when it is not in use.
ONVIF
If this function is enabled, the remote devices can be added through
the ONVIF protocol. This function is enabled by default.
User's Manual
319
Parameter Description
There might be safety risk if this service is enabled. Disable this
function when it is not in use.
NTP Server
After enabling this function, a NTP server can be used to synchronize
the device. This function is enabled by default.
SSH
After enabling this function, you can use SSH service. This function is
disabled by default.
There might be safety risk if this service is enabled. Disable this
function when it is not in use.
Enable Device Discovery
After enabling this function, the device can be searched by other
devices.
Private Protocol
Authentication Mode
●
Security Mode (Recommended): Uses Digest access
authentication when connecting to DVR.
●
Compatible Mode: Select this mode when the client does not
support Digest access authentication.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.19.2.2 802.1x
The device needs to pass 802.1x certication to enter the LAN.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > System Service > 802.1x.
User's Manual
320
Figure 5-279 802.1x
Step 2 Select the Ethernet card you want to certify.
Step 3 Select Enable and congure parameters.
Table 5-75 802.1x parameters
Parameter Description
NIC Name Select a NIC.
Authentication
●
PEAP: protected EAP protocol.
●
TLS: Transport Layer Security. Provide privacy and
data integrity between two communications
application programs.
CA Certicate
Enable it and click Browse to import CA certicate
from ash drive. For details about importing and
creating a certicate, see "5.19.4 CA Certicate".
Username The username shall be authorized at server.
Password Password of the corresponding username.
Step 4 Click Apply.
5.19.2.3 HTTPS
We recommend that you enable HTTPS function to enhance system security.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > System Service > HTTPS.
User's Manual
321
Figure 5-280 HTTPS
Step 2 Select Enable to enable HTTPS function.
Step 3 Click Certicate Management to create or import a HTTPS certicate from USB drive. For
details about importing or creating a CA certicate, see "5.19.4 CA Certicate".
Step 4 Select a HTTPS certicate.
Step 5 Click Apply
5.19.3 Attack Defense
5.19.3.1 Firewall
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > Attack Defense > Firewall.
Step 2 Select Enable to enable rewarll.
Step 3 Congure the parameters.
Table 5-76 Firewall parameters
Parameter Description
Mode
Mode can be congured when Type is Network Access.
●
If Allowlist is enabled, you can visit device port
successfully with IP/MAC hosts in the allowlist.
●
If Blocklist is enabled, you cannot visit device port with
IP/MAC hosts in blocklist.
User's Manual
322
Parameter Description
Add
When Type is Network Access, you can congure IP
Address, IP Segment and MAC Address.
Type You can select IP address, IP segment and MAC address.
IP Address
Enter IP Address, Start Port and End Port that is allowed or
forbidden.
When Type is IP Address, they can be congured. Start
Port and End Port can be congured only in Network
Access Type.
Start Port
End Port
Start Address/End Address
Enter Start Address and End Address of IP Segment.
When Type is IP Segment, they can be congured.
MAC Address
Enter MAC Address that is allowed or forbidden
When Type is MAC Address, it can be congured.
Step 4 Click Apply.
5.19.3.2 Account Lockout
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > Attack Defense > Account Lockout.
Step 2 Set parameters.
Table 5-77 Lockout parameters
Parameter Description
Attempt(s)
Set the maximum number of allowable wrong password
entries. The account will be locked after your entries
exceed the maximum number.
Value range: 5–30.
Default value: 5.
Lock Time
Set how long the account is locked for.
Value range: 5–120 minutes.
Default value: 5 minutes.
Step 3 Click Apply.
User's Manual
323
5.19.3.3 Anti-Dos Attack
You can enable SYN Flood Attack Defense and ICMP Flood Attack Defense to defend the device
against Dos attack.
Figure 5-281 Anti-Dos attack
5.19.3.4 Sync Time-Allowlist
The synchronization is only allowed with hosts in the trusted list.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > Attack Defense > Sync Time-Allowlist.
Step 2 Select Enable to enable the function.
Step 3 Congure the parameters.
Table 5-78 Time-allowlist parameters
Parameter Description
Add You can add trusted hosts for time synchronization.
Type Select IP address or IP segment for hosts to be added.
IP Address
Input the IP address of a trusted host.
When Type is IP Address, it can be congured
Start Address Input the start IP address of trusted hosts.
User's Manual
324
Parameter Description
When Type is IP Segment, it can be congured
End Address
Input the end IP address of trusted hosts.
When Type is IP Segment, it can be congured
Step 4 Click Apply.
5.19.4 CA Certicate
You can create or import device certicate and install trusted CA Certicate.
5.19.4.1 Device Certicate
Creating Certicate
1. Select Main Menu > SECURITY > CA Certicate > Device Certicate.
●
Click to download the certicate to local storage.
●
Click
to delete the certicate. The deleted certicate cannot be restored, proceed with
caution.
Figure 5-282 Device certicate
User's Manual
325
2. Congure parameters.
Table 5-79 Device certicate parameters
Parameter Description
Country/Region This parameter is user dened.
State This parameter is user dened.
City Name This parameter is user dened.
Valid Period Enter a valid period for the certicate.
Organization This parameter is user dened.
Organization Unit This parameter is user dened.
Domain Name Enter the IP address of the certicate.
3. Click Create.
CA Application and Import
Follow the on-screen instructions to nish CA application and import.
Insert a USB ash drive before operating.
Figure 5-283 CA application and import
Import Third-Party Certicate
Insert the USB ash drive with third-party certicate before importing.
1. Select Import Third-party Certicate.
User's Manual
326
Figure 5-284 Import third-party certicate
2. Congure the parameters.
Table 5-80 Import third-party certicate
Parameter Description
Path
Click Browse to nd the third-party certicate path on
the USB drive.
Private Key
Click Browse to nd the third-party certicate private
key on the USB drive.
Private Key Password
Input the password of encrypted private key. When the
private key is not encrypted, you don’t need to this
parameter.
3. Click Create.
5.19.4.2 Trusted CA Certicate
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > CA Certicate > Trusted Certicate.
Step 2 Click Install Trusted Certicate.
User's Manual
327
Figure 5-285 Install certicate
Step 3 Click Browse to select the certicate that you want to install.
Step 4 Click Import.
5.19.5 Audio/Video Encryption
The device supports audio and video encryption during data transmission.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > A/V Encryption > Audio/Video Transmission.
User's Manual
328
Figure 5-286 Audio/video transmission
Step 2 Congure the parameters.
Table 5-81 Transmission parameters
Parameter Description
Private Protocol
Enable
Enable stream frame encryption by using private
protocol.
There might be safety vulnerability if this service is
disabled.
Encryption Type Use the default setting.
Update Period of Secret
Key
Secret key update period.
Value range: 0–720 hours. 0 means never update
the secret key.
Default value: 12.
RTSP over TLS
Enable
Enables RTSP stream encryption by using TLS.
There might be data breach if this service is
disabled. We recommend that you enable this
function.
Select a device certicate Select a device certicate for RTSP over TLS.
User's Manual
329
Parameter Description
Certicate Management
For details about certicate management, see
"5.19.4 CA Certicate".
Step 3 Click Apply.
5.19.6 Security Warning
5.19.6.1 Security Exception
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > Security Warning > Security Exception.
Figure 5-287 Security exception
Step 2 Select Enable and then congure the parameters.
Table 5-82 Security exception parameters
Parameter Description
Alarm-out Port
The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to
the alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the DVR device
transmits the alarm information to the alarm device.
Post-Alarm
When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time.
The time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Show Message Checkbox to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
Buzzer
Select the checkbox to activate the buzzer when an alarm
occurs.
User's Manual
330
Parameter Description
Alarm Tone
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio le
from the dropdown list. System plays the audio le when the
alarm occurs.
Log
Select the checkbox, the DVR device records the alarm
information in the log when an alarm occurs.
Send Email
Select the checkbox. When an alarm occurs, the DVR device
sends an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in
Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.
Security Event monitoring explanation. It indicates the type of
attacks that can trigger security exception.
●
Unauthorized executable program trying to run
●
Web URL brute-force attack
●
Session connection overload
●
Session ID brute-force attack
Step 3 Click Apply.
5.19.6.2 Illegal Login
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SECURITY > Security Warning > Illegal Login.
User's Manual
331
Figure 5-288 Illegal login
Step 2 Select Enable and then congure the parameters.
Table 5-83 Illegal login parameters
Parameter Description
Alarm-out Port
The alarm device (such as lights, sirens) is connected to the alarm
output port. When an alarm occurs, the device transmits the alarm
information to the alarm device.
Post-Alarm
When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The
time range is from 0 seconds through 300 seconds.
Buzzer Select the checkbox to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.
Alarm Tone
Check the box and then select the corresponding audio le from
the dropdown list. System plays the audio le when the alarm
occurs.
Log
Select the checkbox, the device records the alarm information in
the log when an alarm occurs.
Send Email
Select the checkbox. When an alarm occurs, the device sends an
email to the set mailbox to notify the user.
To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in
Main Menu > NETWORK > Email.
Step 3 Click Apply.
User's Manual
332
5.20 Conguring System Settings
5.20.1 Conguring General System Settings
Background Information
You can congure the device basic settings, time settings, and holiday settings.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > SYSTEM > General > Holiday.
Figure 5-289 Holiday
Step 2 Click Add.
Figure 5-290 Add holiday
Step 3 Congure the holiday name, repeat mode, time range according to your actual situation.
User's Manual
333
Step 4 Click Add.
Enable the Add More function, so you can continue adding holiday information.
Figure 5-291 Added holiday
5.20.2 Conguring RS-232 Settings
Select Main Menu > SYSTEMRS232, and then you can congure serial port function, baud rate
and other parameters.
Only some series products support this RS-232.
Figure 5-292 RS-232
User's Manual
334
Table 5-84 RS-232 parameters
Parameter Description
Function
Select serial port control protocol. It is Console by default.
●
Console: Upgrade the program and debug with the console and
mini terminal software.
●
Keyboard: Control this Device with special keyboard.
●
Adapter: Connect with PC directly for transparent transmission
of data.
●
Protocol COM: Congure the function to protocol COM, in order
to overlay card number.
●
PTZ Matrix: Connect matrix control.
Baud Rate Select baud rate, which is 115200 by default.
Data Bits It ranges from 5 to 8, which is 8 by default.
Stop Bits It includes 1 and 2.
Parity It includes none, odd, even, mark and null. It is none by default.
5.20.3 Conguring System Maintenance Settings
Background Information
When the Device has been running for a long time, you can congure the auto reboot when the
Device is not working. You can also congure the case fan mode to reduce noise and extend the
service life.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Manager > Maintenance.
User's Manual
335
Figure 5-293 Maintenance
Step 2 Congure the settings for the system maintenance parameters.
Table 5-85 Maintenance parameters
Parameter Description
Auto Reboot In the Auto Reboot list, select the reboot time.
Case Fan Mode
In the Case Fan Mode list, you can select Always or
Auto. If you select Auto, the case fan will stop or start
according to the external conditions such as the Device
temperature.
This function is available on select models, and it is only
supported on the local conguration page.
Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
5.20.4 Exporting and Importing System Settings
You can export or import the Device system settings if there are several Devices that require the
same setup.
●
The IMP/EXP page cannot be opened if the backup operation is ongoing on the other pages.
●
When you open the IMP/EXP page, the system refreshes the devices and sets the current
directory as the rst root directory.
●
Click Format to format the USB storage device.
User's Manual
336
Exporting System Settings
1. Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Manager > Import/Export.
Figure 5-294 Import/Export
2. Insert a USB storage device into one of the USB ports on the Device.
3. Click Refresh to refresh the page.
User's Manual
337
Figure 5-295 Connected device
4. Click Export.
There is a folder under the name style of "Cong_[YYYYMMDD111hhmmss]". Double-click this
folder to view the backup les.
Importing System Settings
1. Insert a USB storage device containing the exported conguration les from another Device)
into one of the USB ports on the Device.
2. Select Main Menu SYSTEM Import/Export.
3. Click Refresh to refresh the page.
4. Click on the conguration folder (under the name style of "Cong_[YYYYMMDD111hhmmss]")
that you want to import.
5. Click Import.
The Device will reboot after the imported is succeeded.
5.20.5 Restoring Default Settings
Background Information
Only Admin account supports this function.
You can select the settings that you want to restore to the factory default.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Manager > Default.
User's Manual
338
Figure 5-296 Default
Step 2 Restore the settings.
●
Click Default to restore all parameters to default settings except parameters such as
network, user management.
●
Click Factory Default , select OK and then enter the password of admin user in the
prompted dialog box to completely recover device parameters to factory default.
5.20.6 Updating the Device
5.20.6.1 Updating File
Procedure
Step 1 Insert a USB storage device containing the upgrade les into the USB port of the Device.
Step 2 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Manager > Update.
User's Manual
339
Figure 5-297 Update
Step 3 Click Update.
Figure 5-298 Browse
Step 4 Click the le that you want to upgrade.
Step 5 Click OK.
User's Manual
340
5.20.6.2 Performing Online Upgrade
When the Device is connected to Internet, you can use online upgrade function to upgrade the
system.
Before using this function, you need to check whether there is any new version by auto check or
manual check.
●
Auto check: The Device checks if there is any new version available at intervals.
●
Manual check: Perform real-time check whether there is any new version available.
Ensure the correct power supply and network connection during upgrading; otherwise the
upgrading might be failed.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Manager > Update.
Figure 5-299 Update
Step 2 Check whether there is any new version available.
●
Auto check: Enable Auto-check for updates.
●
Manual check: Click Manual Check.
Step 3 If a new version is available, click Upgrade now.
5.20.6.3 Uboot Upgrading
●
Under the root directory in the USB storage device, there must be "u-boot.bin.img" le and
"update.img" le saved, and the USB storage device must be in FAT32 format.
User's Manual
341
●
Make sure the USB storage device is inserted; otherwise the upgrading cannot be performed.
When starting the Device, the system automatically checks whether there is a USB storage device
connected and if there is any upgrade le, and if yes and the check result of the upgrade le is
correct, the system will upgrade automatically. The Uboot upgrade can avoid the situation that you
have to upgrade through +TFTP when the Device is halted.
5.20.7 Exporting Intelligent Diagnosis Data
When an error occurs, go to Main Menu > MAINTAIN > Intelligent Diagnosis to export intelligent
diagnosis data for troubleshooting. The maintenance tasks, such as the import and export of
conguration, can be performed in COS Pro Portal. For details, see the corresponding user's
manual.
5.21 Viewing Information
You can view the information such as log information, HDD information, and version details
5.21.1 Viewing Version Details
You can view the version details such as device model, system version, and build date.
Select Main Menu > INFO > VERSION.
Figure 5-300 Version
User's Manual
342
5.21.2 Viewing Log Information
Background Information
You can view and search the log information.
●
If there is HDD installed, the logs about system operations are saved in the memory of the
Device and other types of logs are saved into the HDD. If there is no HDD installed, the other
types of logs are also saved in the memory of the Device.
●
When formatting the HDD, the logs will not be lost. However, if you take out the HDD from the
Device, the logs might be lost.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > INFO > LOG.
Figure 5-301 Log
Step 2 In the Type list, select the log type that you want to view (System, Cong, Storage,
Record, Account, Clear, Playback, and Connection) or select All to view all logs.
Step 3 In the Start Time box and End Time box, enter the time period to search, and then click
Search.
User's Manual
343
Figure 5-302 Search results
●
Click Details or double-click the log that you want to view, the Detailed Information
page is displayed. Click Next or Previous to view more log information.
●
Click Backup to back up the logs into the USB storage device. You can enable Backup
Encryption and then set a password. The password is required to open the exported
le.
●
Click Clear to remove all logs.
5.21.3 Viewing Event Information
You can view the event information of the Device and channel.
Select Main Menu > INFO > EVENT.
User's Manual
344
Figure 5-303 Event
5.21.4 Viewing Network Information
You can view the online users, network data transmission details, and test network. For details
about testing network, see "5.15.2.1 Testing the Network".
5.21.4.1 Viewing Online Users
You can view the online user information and block any user for a period of time.
Select Main Menu > INFO > NETWORK > Online users.
User's Manual
345
Figure 5-304 Online user
To block an online user, click and then enter the time that you want to block this user. The
maximum value you can set is 65535.
The system detects every 5 seconds to check whether there is any user added or deleted, and
update the user list timely.
5.21.4.2 Viewing the Network Load
Network load means the data ow which measures the transmission capability. You can view the
information such as data receiving speed and sending speed.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Main Menu > INFO > NETWORK > Network Load.
User's Manual
346
Figure 5-305 Network load
Step 2 Click the LAN name that you want to view, for example, LAN1.
The system displays the information of data sending speed and receiving speed.
●
The default display is LAN1 load.
●
Only one LAN load can be displayed at one time.
5.21.5 Viewing HDD Information
You can view the HDD quantity, HDD type, total space, free space, status, and S.M.A.R.T information.
Select Main Menu > INFO > HDD.
User's Manual
347
Figure 5-306 HDD
Table 5-86 HDD parameters
Parameter Description
No.
Indicates the number of the currently connected HDD.
The asterisk (*) means the current working HDD.
Device Name Indicates name of HDD.
Physical Position Indicates installation position of HDD.
Type Indicates HDD type.
Total Space Indicates the total capacity of HDD.
Free Space Indicates the usable capacity of HDD.
Status
Indicates the status of the HDD to show if it is working
normally.
S.M.A.R.T View the S.M.A.R.T reports from HDD detecting.
5.21.6 Viewing Channel Information
You can view the camera information connected to each channel.
Select Main Menu > INFO > CHANNEL INFO.
User's Manual
348
Figure 5-307 Channel information
5.21.7 Viewing Data Stream Information
You can view the real-time data stream rate and resolution of each channel.
Select Main Menu > INFO > BPS.
User's Manual
349
Figure 5-308 BPS
5.22 Logging out of the Device
On the upper-right corner of the Main Menu page or on any page after you have entered the Main
Menu, click
.
●
Select Logout, you will log out of the device.
●
Select Reboot, the Device will be rebooted.
●
Select Shutdown, the Device will be turned o.
User's Manual
350
6 Web Operations
●
The pages in the Manual are used for introducing the operations and only for reference. The
actual page might be dierent dependent on the model you purchased. If there is inconsistency
between the Manual and the actual product, the actual product shall govern.
●
The Manual is a general document for introducing the product, so there might be some
functions described for the Device in the Manual not apply to the model you purchased.
●
Besides the web interface, you can use our Smart PSS to log in to the device. For detailed
information, please refer to Smart PSS user’s manual.
6.1 Connecting to Network
Background Information
●
The factory default IP of the Device is 192.168.1.108.
●
The Device supports monitoring on dierent browsers such as Safari, re fox, Google on Apple
PC to perform the functions such as multi-channel monitoring, PTZ control, and device
parameters congurations.
Procedure
Step 1 Check to make sure the Device has connected to the network.
Step 2 Congure the IP address, subnet mask and gateway for the PC and the Device. For details
about network conguration of the Device, see "5.1.4.4 Conguring Network Settings".
Step 3 On your PC, check the network connection of the Device by using "ping ***.***.***.***".
Usually the return value of TTL is 255.
6.2 Logging in to the Web Interface
Procedure
Step 1 Open the IE browser, enter the IP address of the Device, and then press Enter.
User's Manual
351
Figure 6-1 Login
Step 2 Enter the username and password.
●
The default administrator account is admin. The password is the one that was
congured during initial settings. To security your account, it is recommended to keep
the password properly and change it regularly.
●
Click
to display the password.
Step 3 Click Login.
6.3 Introducing Web Main Menu
After you have logged in to the web interface, the main menu is displayed.
User's Manual
352
Figure 6-2 Main menu
Table 6-1 Main menu description
No. Icon Description
1
Includes conguration menu through which you can
congure camera settings, network settings, storage settings,
system settings, account settings, and view information.
2 None Displays system date and time.
3
When you point to , the current user account is displayed.
4
Click , select Logout , Reboot, or Shutdown according to
your actual situation.
5
Displays Cell Phone Client and Device SN QR Code.
●
Cell Phone Client: Use your mobile phone to scan the QR
code to add the device into the Cell Phone Client, and
then you can start accessing the Device from your cell
phone.
●
Device SN: Obtain the Device SN by scanning the QR code.
Go to the P2P management platform and add the Device
SN into the platform. Then you can access and manage
the device in the WAN. For details, please refer to the P2P
operation manual. You can also congure P2P function in
the local congurations. See "5.1.4.5 Conguring P2P
Settings".
6
Displays the web main menu.
7 None
Includes eight function tiles: LIVE , VIDEO, ALARM, IoT, AI,
BACKUP, DISPLAY, and AUDIO. Click each tile to open the
conguration page of the tile.
●
LIVE : You can perform the operations such as viewing
real-time video, conguring channel layout, setting PTZ
User's Manual
353
No. Icon Description
controls, and using smart talk and instant record functions
if needed.
●
VIDEO : Search for and play back the recorded video
saved on the Device.
●
ALARM : Search for alarm information and congure
alarm event actions.
●
AI : Congure face detection, face recognition, and IVS
functions.
●
MAINTAIN : You can view system information, system
update, and congure import or export.
●
BACKUP : Search and back up the video les to the local
PC or external storage device such as USB storage device.
●
DISPLAY : Congure the display eect such as displaying
content, image transparency, and resolution, and enable
the zero-channel function.
●
AUDIO : Manage audio les and congure the playing
schedule. The audio le can be played in response to an
alarm event if the voice prompts function is enabled.
8 SETTING
Includes six setting tiles. Click each tile to open the
conguration page of the tile.
●
CAMERA : Add cameras, set A/V encode, camera
properties and camera name.
●
NETWORK : Set basic network function, Wi-Fi, email and
P2P.
●
STORAGE : Record schedule, disk management, disk
detection, storage space calculation etc.
●
SYSTEM : Congure basic parameters, system date and
language.
●
SECURITY : Check the security status and modify security
congurations of the device.
●
ACCOUNT : Add/delete user, user permission
management.
6.4 Viewing Open-source Software Notice
Log in to the web, select MAINTAIN > System Info > Legal Info, and then click View to view
open-source software notice.
User's Manual
354
Figure 6-3 Legal information
User's Manual
355
7 FAQ
1. DVR cannot boot up properly.
There are following possibilities:
●
Input power is not correct.
●
Power connection is not correct.
●
Power switch button is damaged.
●
Program upgrade is wrong.
●
HDD malfunction or something wrong with HDD jumper conguration.
●
Seagate DB35.1, DB35.2, SV35 or Maxtor 17-g has compatibility problem. Please upgrade to
the latest version to solve this problem.
●
Front panel error.
●
Main board is damaged.
2. DVR frequently shuts down or stops running.
There are following possibilities:
●
Input voltage is not stable or it is too low.
●
HDD malfunction or something wrong with jumper conguration.
●
Button power is not enough.
●
Front video signal is not stable.
●
Working environment is too harsh, too much dust.
●
Hardware malfunction.
3. Hard disk cannot be detected.
There are following possibilities:
●
HDD is broken.
●
HDD jumper is damaged.
●
HDD cable connection is loose.
●
Main board SATA port is broken.
4. There is no video output whether it is one-channel, multiple-channel or all-channel
output.
There are following possibilities:
●
Program is not compatible. Please upgrade to the latest version.
●
Brightness is 0. Please restore factory default setup.
●
There is no video input signal or it is too weak.
●
Check privacy mask setup or your screen saver.
●
DVR hardware malfunctions.
5. Real-time video color is distorted.
There are following possibilities:
●
When using BNC output, NTSC and PAL setup is not correct. The real-time video becomes
black and white.
●
DVR and monitor resistance is not compatible.
●
Video transmission is too long or degrading is too huge.
●
DVR color or brightness setup is not correct.
6. Cannot search local records.
There are following possibilities:
●
HDD jumper is damaged.
User's Manual
356
●
HDD is broken.
●
Upgraded program is not compatible.
●
The recorded le has been overwritten.
●
Record function has been disabled.
7. Video is distorted when searching local records.
There are following possibilities:
●
Video quality setup is too low.
●
Program read error, bit data is too small. There is mosaic in the full screen. Please restart the
DVR to solve this problem.
●
HDD data jumper error.
●
HDD malfunction.
●
DVR hardware malfunctions.
8. No audio under monitor state.
There are following possibilities:
●
It is not a power picker.
●
It is not a power acoustics.
●
Audio cable is damaged.
●
DVR hardware malfunctions.
9. There is audio under monitor state but no audio under playback state.
There are following possibilities:
●
Setup is not correct. Please enable audio function.
●
Corresponding channel has no video input. Playback is not continuous when the screen is
blue.
10.System time is not correct.
There are following possibilities:
●
Setup is not correct.
●
Battery contact is not correct or voltage is too low.
●
Crystal oscillator is broken.
11.Cannot control PTZ on DVR.
There are following possibilities:
●
Front panel PTZ error.
●
PTZ decoder setup, connection or installation is not correct.
●
Cable connection is not correct.
●
PTZ setup is not correct.
●
PTZ decoder and DVR protocol is not compatible.
●
PTZ decoder and DVR address is not compatible.
●
When there are several decoders, please add 120 Ohm between the PTZ decoder A/B cables
furthest end to delete the reverberation or impedance matching. Otherwise the PTZ control
is not stable.
●
The distance is too far.
12.Motion detection function does not work.
There are following possibilities:
●
Period setup is not correct.
●
Motion detection zone setup is not correct.
●
Sensitivity is too low.
●
For some versions, there is hardware limit.
User's Manual
357
13.Cannot log in client-end or web.
There are following possibilities:
●
For Windows 98 or Windows ME user, please update your system to Windows 2000 sp4. Or
you can install client-end software of lower version. Please note right now, our DVR is not
compatible with Windows VISTA control.
●
ActiveX control has been disabled.
●
No dx8.1 or higher. Please upgrade display card driver.
●
Network connection error.
●
Network setup error.
●
Password or username is invalid.
●
Client-end is not compatible with DVR program.
14.There is only mosaic no video when preview or playback video le remotely.
There are following possibilities:
●
Network uency is not good.
●
Client-end resources are limit.
●
There is multiple-cast group setup in DVR. This mode can result in mosaic. Usually we do not
recommend this mode.
●
There is privacy mask or channel protection setup.
●
Current user has no right to monitor.
●
DVR local video output quality is not good.
15.Network connection is not stable.
There are following possibilities:
●
Network is not stable.
●
IP address conict.
●
MAC address conict.
●
PC or DVR network card is not good.
16.Burn error /USB back error.
There are following possibilities:
●
Burner and DVR are in the same data cable.
●
System uses too much CPU resources. Please stop record rst and then begin backup.
●
Data amount exceeds backup device capacity. It might result in burner error.
●
Backup device is not compatible.
●
Backup device is damaged.
17.Keyboard cannot control DVR.
There are following possibilities:
●
DVR serial port setup is not correct.
●
Address is not correct.
●
When there are several switchers, power supply is not enough.
●
Transmission distance is too far.
18.Alarm signal cannot be disarmed.
There are following possibilities:
●
Alarm setup is not correct.
●
Alarm output has been open manually.
●
Input device error or connection is not correct.
●
Some program versions might have this problem. Please upgrade your system.
19.Alarm function is null.
User's Manual
358
There are following possibilities:
●
Alarm setup is not correct.
●
Alarm cable connection is not correct.
●
Alarm input signal is not correct.
●
There are two loops connect to one alarm device.
20.Remote control does not work.
There are following possibilities:
●
Remote control address is not correct.
●
Distance is too far or control angle is too small.
●
Remote control battery power is low.
●
Remote control is damaged or DVR front panel is damaged.
21.Record storage period is not enough.
There are following possibilities:
●
Camera quality is too low. Lens is dirty. Camera is installed against the light. Camera aperture
setup is not correct.
●
HDD capacity is not enough.
●
HDD is damaged.
22.Cannot playback the downloaded le.
There are following possibilities:
●
There is no media player.
●
No DXB8.1 or higher graphic acceleration software.
●
There is no DivX503Bundle.exe control when you play the le transformed to AVI via media
player.
●
No DivX503Bundle.exe or dshow-2004 1012 .exe in Windows XP OS.
23.Forgot local menu operation password or network password
Please contact your local service engineer or our sales person for help. We can guide you to
solve this problem.
24.When I log in via HTTPS, a dialogue says the certicate for this website is for other
address.
Create server certicate again.
25.When I log in via HTTPS, a dialogue says the certicate is not trusted.
Download root certicate again.
26.When I log in via HTTPS, a dialogue says the certicate has expired or is not valid yet.
Make sure your PC time is the same as the device time.
27.I connect the general analog camera to the device, there is no video output.
There are following possibilities:
●
Check camera power supplying, data cable connection and other items.
●
This series device does not support the analog camera of all brands. Please make sure the
device supports general standard denition analog camera.
28.I connect the standard denition analog camera or the coaxial camera to the device, there
is no video output.
There are following possibilities:
●
Check camera power supplying, or camera data cable connection.
User's Manual
359
●
For the product supports analog standard denition camera/HD camera, you need to go to
the Main Menu > CAMERA > CHANNEL TYPE to select corresponding channel type and
then restart the DVR.
29.I cannot connect to the IP channel.
There are following possibilities:
●
Check the camera is online or not.
●
Check IP channel setup is right or not (such as IP address, username, password, connection
protocol, and port number).
●
The camera has set the allowlist (Only the specied devices can connect to the camera).
30.After I connected to the IP channel, the one-window output is OK, but there is no multiple-
window output.
There are following possibilities:
●
Check the sub stream of the camera has been enabled or not.
●
Check the sub stream type of the camera is H.264 or not.
●
Check the device supports camera sub stream resolution or not (such as 960H, D1, and HD1).
31.After I connected to the IP channel, the multiple-window output is OK, but there is no one-
window output.
There are following possibilities:
●
Check there is video from the IP channel or not. Please go to the Main Menu > INFO > BPS
to view bit stream real-time information.
●
Check the main stream of the camera has been enabled or not.
●
Check the main stream type of the camera is H.264 or not.
●
Check the device supports camera main stream resolution or not (such as 960H, D1, and
HD1).
●
Check camera network transmission has reached the threshold or not. Check the online user
of the camera.
32.After I connected to the IP channel, there is no video output in the one-window or the
multiple-window mode. But I can see there is bit stream.
There are following possibilities:
●
Check the main stream/sub stream type of the camera is H.264 or not.
●
Check the device supports camera main stream/sub stream resolution or not (such as 1080P,
720P, 960H, D1, and HD1).
●
Check the camera setup. Please make sure It supports the products of other manufacturers.
33.DDNS registration failed or cannot access the device domain name.
There are following possibilities:
●
Check the device is connected to the WAN. Please check the device has got the IP address if
the PPPoE can dial. If there is a router, please check the router to make sure the device IP is
online.
●
Check the corresponding protocol of the DDNS is enabled. Check the DDNS function is OK or
not.
●
Check DNS setup is right or not. Default Google DNS server is 8.8.8.8, 8.8.5.5. You can use
dierent DNS provided by your ISP.
34.I cannot use the P2P function on my cell phone or the web.
There are following possibilities:
●
Check the device P2P function is enabled or not. (Main menu- > Setting- > Network- >
P2P)
●
Check the device is in the WAN or not.
User's Manual
360
●
Check cell phone P2P login mode is right or not.
●
It is the specied device P2P login port or not when you are using P2P client.
●
Check username or password is right or not.
●
Check P2P SN is right or not. You can use the cell phone to scan the QR code on the device
P2P page (Main Menu > Network > P2P), or you can use the version information of the
WEB to conrm. (For some previous series products, the device SN is the main board SN, it
might result in error.)
35.I connect the standard denition camera to the device, there is no video output.
There are following possibilities:
●
Check the DVR supports standard denition signal or not. Only some series product supports
analog standard denition signal, coaxial signal input.
●
Check channel type is right or not. For the product supports analog standard denition
camera/HD camera, you need to go to the Main Menu > CAMERA > CHANNEL TYPE to
select corresponding channel type (such as analog) and then restart the DVR. In this way, the
DVR can recognize the analog standard denition.
●
Check camera power supplying, or camera data cable connection.
36.I cannot connect to the IP camera.
There are following possibilities:
●
Check DVR supports IP channel or not. Only some series products support A/D switch
function, it can switch analog channel to the IP channel to connect to the IP camera. From
Main Menu > CAMERA > CHANNEL TYPE, select the last channel to switch to the IP
channel. Some series product products support IP channel extension, it supports N+N mode.
●
Check the IPC and the DVR is connected or not. Please go to the Main Menu > CAMERA >
REGISTRATION to search to view the IP camera is online or not. Or you can go to the Main
Menu > CAMERA INFO > NETWORK > Network Test, you can input IP camera IP address
and then click the Test button to check you can connect to the IP camera or not.
●
Check IP channel setup is right or not (such as IP address, manufacturer, port, username,
password, and remote channel number).
Daily Maintenance
●
Use the brush to clean the board, socket connector and the chassis regularly.
●
The device shall be soundly earthed in case there is audio/video disturbance. Keep the device
away from the static voltage or induced voltage.
●
Unplug the power cable before you remove the audio/video signal cable, RS-232 or RS-485
cable.
●
Do not connect the TV to the local video output port (VOUT). It might result in video output
circuit.
●
Always shut down the device properly. Please use the shutdown function in the menu, or you
can press the power button in the front panel for at least three seconds to shut down the device.
Otherwise it might result in HDD malfunction.
●
Make sure the device is away from the direct sunlight or other heating sources. Please keep the
sound ventilation.
●
Check and maintain the device regularly.
User's Manual
361
Appendix 1 Glossary
The abbreviations in this glossary are related to the Manual.
Appendix Table 1-1Glossary
Abbreviations Full term
BNC Bayonet Nut Connector
CBR Constant Bit Rate
CIF Common Intermediate Format
DDNS Dynamic Domain Name Service
DHCP Dynamic Host Conguration Protocol
DNS Domain Name System
DST Daylight Saving Time
DVR Digital Video Recorder
FTP File Transfer Protocol
HDD Hard Disk Drive
HDMI High Denition Multimedia Interface
HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
IoT Internet of Things
IP Internet Protocol
IVS Intelligent Video System
LAN Local Area Network
MAC Media Access Control
MTU Maximum Transmission Unit
NTP Network Time Protocol
NTSC National Television Standards Committee
ONVIF Open Network Video Interface Forum
PAL Phase Alteration Line
PAT Port Address Translation
POS Point of Sale
PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
PSS Professional Surveillance Software
PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom
RCA Radio Corporation of American
RTSP Real Time Streaming Protocol
S.M.A.R.T Self-Monitoring-Analysis and Reporting Technology
SATA Serial Advanced Technology Attachment
User's Manual
362
Abbreviations Full term
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol
UDP User Datagram Protocol
UPnP Universal Plug and Play
VBR Variable Bit Rate
VGA Video Graphics Array
WAN Wide Area Network
User's Manual
363
Appendix 2 HDD Capacity Calculation
Calculate total capacity needed by each DVR according to video recording (video recording type
and video le storage time).
Procedure
Step 1 According to Formula (1) to calculate storage capacity that is the capacity of each channel
needed for each hour, unit MB.
In the formula: means the bit rate, unit Kbit/s
Step 2 After video time requirement is conrmed, according to Formula (2) to calculate the
storage capacity, which is storage of each channel needed unit MB.
In the formula:
●
means the recording time for each day (hour)
●
means number of days for which the video shall be kept
Step 3 According to Formula (3) to calculate total capacity (accumulation) that is needed for all
channels in the DVR during scheduled video recording.
In the formula: means total number of channels in one DVR.
Step 4 According to Formula (4) to calculate total capacity (accumulation) that is needed for
all channels in DVR during alarm video recording (including motion detection).
In the formula: means alarm occurrence rate.
You can refer to the following table for the le size in one hour per channel. (All the data
listed below are for reference only.)
Appendix Table 2-1HDD capacity calculation
Bit Stream Size (max) File Size Bit Stream Size (max) File Size
96 Kbps 42 MB 128 Kbps 56 MB
160 Kbps 70 MB 192 Kbps 84 MB
224 Kbps 98 MB 256 Kbps 112 MB
320 Kbps 140 MB 384 Kbps 168 MB
448 Kbps 196 MB 512 Kbps 225 MB
640 Kbps 281 MB 768 Kbps 337 MB
896 Kbps 393 MB 1024 Kbps 450 MB
1280 Kbps 562 MB 1536 Kbps 675 MB
1792 Kbps 787 MB 2048 Kbps 900 MB
User's Manual
364
Appendix 3 Compatible Backup Devices
Appendix 3.1 Compatible USB List
Appendix Table 3-1Compatible USB
Manufacturer Model Capacity
Sandisk Cruzer Micro 512 MB
Sandisk Cruzer Micro 1 GB
Sandisk Cruzer Micro 2 GB
Sandisk Cruzer Freedom 256 MB
Sandisk Cruzer Freedom 512 MB
Sandisk Cruzer Freedom 1 GB
Sandisk Cruzer Freedom 2 GB
Kingston DataTravelerII 1 GB
Kingston DataTravelerII 2 GB
Kingston DataTraveler 1 GB
Kingston DataTraveler 2 GB
Maxell USB Flash Stick 128 MB
Maxell USB Flash Stick 256 MB
Maxell USB Flash Stick 512 MB
Maxell USB Flash Stick 1 GB
Maxell USB Flash Stick 2 GB
Kingax Super Stick 128 MB
Kingax Super Stick 256 MB
Kingax Super Stick 512 MB
Kingax Super Stick 1 GB
Kingax Super Stick 2 GB
Netac U210 128 MB
Netac U210 256 MB
Netac U210 512 MB
Netac U210 1 GB
Netac U210 2 GB
Netac U208 4 GB
Teclast Ti Cool 128 MB
Teclast Ti Cool 256 MB
Teclast Ti Cool 512 MB
User's Manual
365
Manufacturer Model Capacity
Teclast Ti Cool 1 GB
Sandisk Cruzer Micro 2 GB
Sandisk Cruzer Micro 8 GB
Sandisk Ti Cool 2 GB
Sandisk Hongjiao 4 GB
Lexar Lexar 256 MB
Kingston Data Traveler 1 GB
Kingston Data Traveler 16 GB
Kingston Data Traveler 32 GB
Aigo L8315 16 GB
Sandisk 250 16 GB
Kingston Data Traveler Locker+ 32 GB
Netac U228 8 GB
Appendix 3.2 Compatible SD Card List
Appendix Table 3-2Compatible SD cards
Manufacturer Standard Capacity Card type
Transcend SD111HC6 16 GB Big
Kingston SD111HC4 4 GB Big
Kingston SD 2 GB Big
Kingston SD 1 GB Big
Sandisk SD111HC2 8 GB Small
Sandisk SD 1 GB Small
Appendix 3.3 Compatible Portable HDD List
Appendix Table 3-3Compatible portable HDD
Manufacturer Model Capacity
YDStar YDstar HDD box 40 GB
Netac Netac 80 GB
Iomega
Iomega RPHD-CG"
RNAJ50U287
250 GB
WD Elements WCAVY1205901 1.5 TB
Newsmy Liangjian 320 GB
WD Elements WDBAAR5000ABK-00 500 GB
User's Manual
366
Manufacturer Model Capacity
WD Elements WDBAAU0015HBK-00 1.5 TB
Seagate FreeAgent Go(ST905003F) 500 GB
Aigo H8169 500 GB
Appendix 3.4 Compatible USB DVD List
Appendix Table 3-4Compatible USB DVD
Manufacturer Model
Samsung SE-S084
BenQ LD2000-2K4
Appendix 3.5 Compatible SATA DVD List
Manufacturer Model
LG GH22NS30
Samsung TS-H653 Ver.A
Samsung TS-H653 Ver.F
Samsung SH-224BB/CHXH
SONY DRU-V200S
SONY DRU-845S
SONY AW-G170S
Pioneer DVR-217CH
Appendix 3.6 Compatible SATA HDD List
Please upgrade the DVR rmware to latest version to ensure the accuracy of the table below. Here
we recommend HDD of 500 GB to 4 TB capacity.
Appendix Table 3-5Compatible SATA HDD
Manufacturer Series Model Capacity Port Mode
Seagate Video 3.5 ST1000VM002 1 TB SATA
Seagate Video 3.5 ST2000VM003 2 TB SATA
Seagate Video 3.5 ST3000VM002 3 TB SATA
Seagate Video 3.5 ST4000VM000 4 TB SATA
Seagate SV35 ST1000VX000 1 TB SATA
Seagate SV35 ST2000VX000 2 TB SATA
User's Manual
367
Manufacturer Series Model Capacity Port Mode
Seagate SV35 ST3000VX000 3 TB SATA
Seagate
SV35 (Support
HDD data
recovery oered
by Seagate)
ST1000VX002 1 TB SATA
Seagate
SV35 (Support
HDD data
recovery oered
by Seagate)
ST2000VX004 2 TB SATA
Seagate
SV35 (Support
HDD data
recovery oered
by Seagate)
ST3000VX004 3 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST1000VX001 1 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST1000VX005 1 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST2000VX003 2 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST2000VX008 2 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST3000VX006 3 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST3000VX010 3 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST4000VX000 4 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST4000VX007 4 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST5000VX0001 5 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST6000VX0001 6 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST6000VX0023 6 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST6000VX0003 6 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST8000VX0002 8 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST8000VX0022 8 TB SATA
Seagate SkyHawk HDD ST100000VX0004 10 TB SATA
Seagate
SkyHawk HDD
(Support HDD
data recovery
oered by
Seagate)
ST1000VX003 1 TB SATA
Seagate
SkyHawk HDD
(Support HDD
data recovery
oered by
Seagate)
ST2000VX005 2 TB SATA
Seagate
SkyHawk HDD
(Support HDD
data recovery
ST3000VX005 3 TB SATA
User's Manual
368
Manufacturer Series Model Capacity Port Mode
oered by
Seagate)
Seagate
SkyHawk HDD
(Support HDD
data recovery
oered by
Seagate)
ST4000VX002 4 TB SATA
Seagate
SkyHawk HDD
(Support HDD
data recovery
oered by
Seagate)
ST5000VX0011 5 TB SATA
Seagate
SkyHawk HDD
(Support HDD
data recovery
oered by
Seagate)
ST6000VX0011 6 TB SATA
Seagate
SkyHawk HDD
(Support HDD
data recovery
oered by
Seagate)
ST8000VX0012 8 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD10EURX (EOL) 1 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD20EURX (EOL) 2 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD30EURX (EOL) 3 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD40EURX (EOL) 4 TB SATA
WD WD Purple WD10PURX 1 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD20PURX 2 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD30PURX 3 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD40PURX 4 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD50PURX 5 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD60PURX 6 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD80PUZX 8 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD10PURZ 1 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD20PURZ 2 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD30PURZ 3 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD40PURZ 4 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD50PURZ 5 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD60PURZ 6 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD80PURZ 8 TB SATA
WD WD Green WD4NPURX 4 TB SATA
User's Manual
369
Manufacturer Series Model Capacity Port Mode
WD WD Green WD6NPURX 6 TB SATA
TOSHIBA Mars DT01ABA100V 1 TB SATA
TOSHIBA Mars DT01ABA200V 2 TB SATA
TOSHIBA Mars DT01ABA300V 3 TB SATA
TOSHIBA Sonance MD03ACA200V 2 TB SATA
TOSHIBA Sonance MD03ACA300V 3 TB SATA
TOSHIBA Sonance MD03ACA400V 4 TB SATA
TOSHIBA Sonance MD04ABA400V 4 TB SATA
TOSHIBA Sonance MD04ABA500V 5 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SATA
interface)
ST1000NM0033 1 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SATA
interface)
ST2000NM0033 2 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SATA
interface)
ST3000NM0033 3 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SATA
interface)
ST4000NM0033 4 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SATA
interface)
ST1000NM0055 1 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SATA
interface)
ST2000NM0055 2 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SATA
interface)
ST3000NM0005 3 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SATA
interface)
ST4000NM0035 4 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SATA
interface)
ST6000NM0115 6 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SATA
interface)
ST8000NM0055 8 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SATA
interface)
ST10000NM0016 10 TB SATA
User's Manual
370
Manufacturer Series Model Capacity Port Mode
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SATA
interface)
ST4000NM0024 4 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SATA
interface)
ST6000NM0024 6 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SAS
interface)
ST1000NM0023 1 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SAS
interface)
ST2000NM0023 2 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SAS
interface)
ST3000NM0023 3 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SAS
interface)
ST4000NM0023 4 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SAS
interface)
ST6000NM0014 6 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SAS
interface)
ST1000NM0045 1 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SAS
interface)
ST2000NM0045 2 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SAS
interface)
ST3000NM0025 3 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SAS
interface)
ST4000NM0025 4 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SAS
interface)
ST6000NM0095 6 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SAS
interface)
ST6000NM0034 6 TB SATA
Seagate
Constellation ES
series (SAS
interface)
ST8000NM0075 8 TB SATA
WD
WD RE series
(SATA interface)
WD1003FBYZ 1 TB SATA
User's Manual
371
Manufacturer Series Model Capacity Port Mode
WD
WD RE series
(SATA interface)
WD1004FBYZ
(replace
WD1003FBYZ)
1 TB SATA
WD
WD RE series
(SATA interface)
WD2000FYYZ 2 TB SATA
WD
WD RE series
(SATA interface)
WD2004FBYZ(repl
ace WD2000FYYZ)
2 TB SATA
WD
WD RE series
(SATA interface)
WD3000FYYZ 3 TB SATA
WD
WD RE series
(SATA interface)
WD4000FYYZ 4 TB SATA
WD
WD (SATA
interface)
WD2000F9YZ 2 TB SATA
WD
WD (SATA
interface)
WD3000F9YZ 3 TB SATA
WD
WD (SATA
interface)
WD4000F9YZ 4 TB SATA
WD
WD (SATA
interface)
WD4002FYYZ 4 TB SATA
WD
WD (SATA
interface)
WD6001FSYZ 6 TB SATA
WD
WD (SATA
interface)
WD6002FRYZ 6 TB SATA
WD
WD (SATA
interface)
WD8002FRYZ 8 TB SATA
HITACHI
Ultrastar series
(SATA interface)
HUS724030ALA64
0
3 TB SATA
HITACHI
Ultrastar series
(SATA interface)
HUS726060ALE61
0
6 TB SATA
HITACHI
Ultrastar series
(SATA interface)
HUH728060ALE60
0
6 TB SATA
HITACHI
Ultrastar series
(SATA interface)
HUH728080ALE60
0
8 TB SATA
HITACHI
Ultrastar series
(SAS interface)
HUS726020AL521
0
2 TB SATA
HITACHI
Ultrastar series
(SAS interface)
HUS726040AL521
0
4 TB SATA
HITACHI
Ultrastar series
(SAS interface)
HUS726060AL521
0
6 TB SATA
Seagate Pipeline HD Mini ST320VT000 320 GB SATA
Seagate Pipeline HD Mini ST500VT000 500 GB SATA
User's Manual
372
Manufacturer Series Model Capacity Port Mode
Seagate Pipeline HD Mini
ST2000LM003
(EOL)
2 TB SATA
TOSHIBA 2.5-inch PC series MQ01ABD050V 500 GB SATA
TOSHIBA 2.5-inch PC series MQ01ABD100V 1 TB SATA
SAMSUNG HN-M101MBB
HN-M101MBB
(EOL)
1 TB SATA
Seagate
2.5-inch
enterprise series
ST1000NX0313 1 TB SATA
Seagate
2.5-inch
enterprise series
ST2000NX0253 1 TB SATA
User's Manual
373
Appendix 4 Compatible CD/DVD Burner List
Upgrade the DVR rmware to latest version to ensure the accuracy of the table below. And you can
use the USB cable with the model recommended to set USB burner.
Appendix Table 4-1Compatible CD/DVD burner
Manufacturer Model Port Type Type
Sony DRX-S50U USB DVD-RW
Sony DRX-S70U USB DVD-RW
Sony AW-G170S SATA DVD-RW
Samsung TS-H653A SATA DVD-RW
Panasonic SW-9588-C SATA DVD-RW
Sony DRX-S50U USB DVD-RW
BenQ 5232WI USB DVD-RW
User's Manual
374
Appendix 5 Compatible Displayer List
Please refer to the following table form compatible displayer list.
Appendix Table 5-1Compatible displayer
Brand Model Dimension (Unit: inch)
BENQ (LCD) ET-0007-TA 19-inch (wide screen)
DELL (LCD) E178FPc 17-inch
BENQ (LCD)
Q7T4 17-inch
Q7T3 17-inch
HFNOVO (LCD) LXB-L17C 17-inch
SANGSUNG (LCD) 225BW 22-inch (wide screen)
HFNOVO (CRT) LXB-FD17069HB 17-inch
HFNOVO (CRT) LXB-HF769A 17-inch
HFNOVO(CRT) LX-GJ556D 17-inch
Samsung (LCD) 2494HS 24-inch
Samsung (LCD) P2350 23-inch
Samsung (LCD) P2250 22-inch
Samsung (LCD) P2370G 23-inch
Samsung (LCD) 2043 20-inch
Samsung (LCD) 2243EW 22-inch
Samsung (LCD) SMT-1922P 19-inch
Samsung (LCD) T190 19-inch
Samsung (LCD) T240 24-inch
LG (LCD) W1942SP 19-inch
LG (LCD) W2243S 22-inch
LG (LCD) W2343T 23-inch
BENQ (LCD) G900HD 18.5-inch
BENQ (LCD) G2220HD 22-inch
PHILIPS (LCD) 230E 23-inch
PHILIPS (LCD) 220CW9 23-inch
PHILIPS (LCD) 220BW9 24-inch
PHILIPS (LCD) 220EW9 25-inch
User's Manual
375
Appendix 6 Compatible Switcher
Appendix Table 6-1Compatible switcher
Brand Model network working mode
D-LinK DES-1016D 10/100M self-adaptive
D-LinK DES-1008D 10/100M self-adaptive
Ruijie RG-S1926S
Five network modes:
●
AUTO
●
HALF-10M
●
FULL-10M
●
HALF-100M
●
FULL-100M
H3C H3C-S1024 10/100M self-adaptive
TP-LINK TL-SF1016 10/100M self-adaptive
TP-LINK TL-SF1008+ 10/100M self-adaptive
User's Manual
376
Appendix 7 Earthing
Appendix 7.1 What is the Surge
Surge is a short current or voltage change during a very short time. In the circuit, it lasts for
microsecond. In a 220 V circuit, the 5KV or 10KV voltage change during a very short time (about
microseconds) can be called a surge. The surge comes from two ways: external surge and internal
surge.
●
The external surge: The external surge mainly comes from the thunder lightning. Or it comes
from the voltage change during the on/o operation in the electric power cable.
●
The internal surge: The research nds 88% of the surge from the low voltage comes from the
internal of the building such as the air conditioning, elevator, electric welding, air compressor,
water pump, power button, duplicating machine and other device of inductive load.
The lightning surge is far above the load level the PC or the micro devices can support. In most
cases, the surge can result in electric device chip damage, PC error code, accelerating the part
aging, data loss and etc. Even when a small 20 horsepower inductive engine boots up or stops, the
surge can reach 3000 V to 5000 V, which can adversely aect the electronic devices that use the
same distribution box.
To protect the device, you need to evaluate its environment, the lightning aection degree
objectively. Because surge has close relationship with the voltage amplitude, frequency, network
structure, device voltage-resistance, protection level, ground and etc. The thunder proof work shall
be a systematic project, emphasizing the all-round protection (including building, transmission
cable, device, ground and etc.). There shall be comprehensive management and the measures shall
be scientic, reliable, practical and economic. Considering the high voltage during the inductive
thundering, the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standard on the energy absorbing
step by step theory and magnitude classication in the protection zone, you need to prepare
multiple precaution levels.
You can use the lightning rod, lightning strap or the lightning net to reduce the damage to the
building, personal injury or the property.
The lightning protection device can be divided into three types:
●
Power lightning arrester: There are 220 V single-phrase lightning arrester and 380 V three-
phrase lightning arrester (mainly in parallel connection, sometimes use series connection) You
can parallel connect the power lightning arrester in the electric cable to reduce the short-time
voltage change and release the surge current. From the BUS to the device, there are usually
three levels so that system can reduce the voltage and release the current step by step to
remove the thunderstorm energy and guarantee the device safety. You can select the
replaceable module type, the terminal connection type and portable socket according to your
requirement.
●
Signal lightning arrester: This device is mainly used in the PC network, communication system.
The connection type is serial connection. Once you connected the signal lightning arrestor with
the signal port, it can cut the channel of the thunderstorm to the device, and on the other hand,
it can discharge the current to the ground to guarantee the device proper work. The signal
lightning arrester has many specications, and widely used in many devices such as telephone,
network, analog communication, digital communication, cable TV and satellite antenna. For all
the input port, especially those from the outdoor, you need to install the signal lightning
arrester.
●
Antenna feed cable lightning arrester: It is suitable for antenna system of the transmitter or the
device system to receive the wireless signal. It uses the serial connection too.
User's Manual
377
Please note, when you select the lightning arrester, please pay attention to the port type and the
earthing reliability. In some important environment, you need to use special shielded cable. Do not
parallel connect the thunder proof ground cable with the ground cable of the lightning rod. Please
make sure they are far enough and grounded respectively.
Appendix 7.2 The Earthing Modes
We all know the earthing is the most complicated technology in the electromagnetism
compatibility design since there is no systematic theory or module. The earthing has many modes,
but the selection depends on the system structure and performance.
The following are some successfully experience from our past work.
●
One-point ground : In the following gure you can see there is a one-point ground. This
connection provides common point to allow signal to be transmitted in many circuits. If there is
no common point, the error signal transmission occurred. In the one-point ground mode, each
circuit is just grounded only and they are connected at the same point. Since there is only one
common point, there is no circuit and so, there is no interference.
Appendix Figure 7- 1 One-point ground
●
Multiple-point ground : In the following gure, you can see the internal circuit uses the chassis
as the common point. While at the same time, all devices chassis use the earthing as the
common point. In this connection, the ground structure can provide the lower ground
resistance because when there are multiple-point grounds; each ground cable is as short as
possible. And the parallel cable connection can reduce the total conductance of the ground
conductor. In the high-frequency circuit, you need to use the multiple-point ground mode and
each cable needs to connect to the ground. The length shall be less than the 1/20 of the signal
wavelength.
User's Manual
378
Appendix Figure 7- 2 Multiple-point ground
●
Mixed ground : The mix ground consists of the feature of the one-point ground and multiple-
point ground. For example, the power in the system needs to use the one-point ground mode
while the radio frequency signal requires the multiple-point ground. So, you can use the
following gure to earth. For the direct current (DC), the capacitance is open circuit and the
circuit is one-point ground. For the radio frequency signal, the capacitance is conducive and the
circuit adopts multiple-point ground.
Appendix Figure 7- 3 Mixed ground
When connecting devices of huge size (the device physical dimension and connection cable is big
comparing with the wave path of existed interference), then there is possibility of interference
when the current goes through the chassis and cable. In this situation, the interference circuit path
usually lies in the system ground circuit.
When considering the earthing, you need to think about two aspects: One is the system
compatibility, and the other is the external interference coupling into the earth circuit, which
results in system error. For the external interference is not regular, it is not easy to resolve.
Appendix 7.3 Thunder Proof Ground Method in the Monitor
System
●
The monitor system shall have sound thunder proof earthing to guarantee personnel safety and
device safety.
●
The monitor system working ground resistance shall be less than 1 Ω.
User's Manual
379
●
The thunder proof ground shall adopt the special ground cable from the monitor control room
to the ground object. The ground cable adopts copper insulation cable or wire and its ground
section shall be more than 20mm2.
●
The ground cable of the monitor system cannot short circuit or mixed connected with the
strong alternative current cable.
●
For all the ground cables from the control room to the monitor system or ground cable of other
monitor devices, please use the copper resistance soft cable and its section shall be more than 4
mm2.
●
The monitor system usually can adopt the one-point ground.
●
Connect the ground end of 3-pin socket in the monitor system to the ground port of the system
(protection ground cable)
Appendix 7.4 The Shortcut Way to Check the Electric System by
Digital Multimeter
For 220 VAC socket, from the top to the bottom, E (ground cable), N (neutral cable), L (live cable).
Please refer to the following gure.
Appendix Figure 7- 4 Socket
There is a shortcut way to check whether these three cables connection are standard or not (not the
accurate check).
In the following operations, the multimeter range shall be at 750 V.
For E (earth cable)
Turn the digital multimeter to 750 VAC, use your one hand to hold the metal end, and then the
other hand inserts the pen to the E port of the socket. See the following gure. If the multimeter
shows 0, then you can see current earth cable connection is standard. If the value is more than 10,
then you can know there is inductive current and the earth cable connection is not proper.
User's Manual
380
Appendix Figure 7- 5 Check earth cable connection
For L (live cable)
Turn the digital multimeter to 750 VAC, use your one hand to hold the metal end, and then the
other hand inserts the pen to the L port of the socket. See the following gure. If the multimeter
shows 125, then you can see current live cable connection is standard. If the value is less than 60,
then you can know current live cable connection is not proper or it is not the live cable at all.
User's Manual
381
Appendix Figure 7- 6 Check live cable connection
For N (Neutral cable)
Turn the digital multimeter to 750 VAC, use your one hand to hold the metal end, and then the
other hand inserts the pen to the N port of the socket. See the following gure. If the multimeter
shows 0, then you can see current N cable connection is standard. If the value is more than 10, then
you can see there is inductive current and the neutral cable connection is not proper. If the value is
120, then you can know that you have misconnected the neutral cable to the live cable.
User's Manual
382
Appendix Figure 7- 7 Check neutral cable connection
User's Manual
383
Appendix 8 RJ45-RS232 Connection Cable
Denition
Refer to the following gure for RJ-45 cable denition.
Appendix Figure 8- 1 RJ-45
Refer to the following gure for RS-232 pin denition.
Appendix Figure 8- 2 RS-232
Cross Connection
Refer to the following gure for connection information.
User's Manual
384
Appendix Figure 8- 3 Cross connection
Refer to the following table for detailed crossover cable connection information.
Appendix Table 8-1Crossover cable connection
RJ-45 (T568B) RJ-45 (Network cable) RS-232 Signal Description
4 Blue 2 RXD
5 White and blue 3 TXD
3 White and green 5 GND
Straight Connection
Please refer to the following gure for straight cable connection information.
Appendix Figure 8- 4 Straight cable connection
Refer to the following table for straight connection information.
Appendix Table 8-2Straight connection
RJ-45 (T568B) RJ-45 (Network cable) RS-232 Signal Description
4 Blue 3 RXD
5 White and blue 2 TXD
3 White and green 5 GND
User's Manual
385
Appendix 9 Cybersecurity Recommendations
Cybersecurity is more than just a buzzword: it’s something that pertains to every device that is
connected to the internet. IP video surveillance is not immune to cyber risks, but taking basic steps
toward protecting and strengthening networks and networked appliances will make them less
susceptible to attacks. Below are some tips and recommendations from Dahua on how to create a
more secured security system.
Mandatory actions to be taken for basic device network security:
1. Use Strong Passwords
Please refer to the following suggestions to set passwords:
●
The length should not be less than 8 characters.
●
Include at least two types of characters; character types include upper and lower case letters,
numbers and symbols.
●
Do not contain the account name or the account name in reverse order.
●
Do not use continuous characters, such as 123, abc, etc.
●
Do not use overlapped characters, such as 111, aaa, etc.
2. Update Firmware and Client Software in Time
●
According to the standard procedure in Tech-industry, we recommend to keep your device
(such as NVR, DVR, IP camera, etc.) rmware up-to-date to ensure the system is equipped
with the latest security patches and xes. When the device is connected to the public
network, it is recommended to enable the “auto-check for updates” function to obtain timely
information of rmware updates released by the manufacturer.
●
We suggest that you download and use the latest version of client software.
"Nice to have" recommendations to improve your device network security:
1. Physical Protection
We suggest that you perform physical protection to device, especially storage devices. For
example, place the device in a special computer room and cabinet, and implement well-done
access control permission and key management to prevent unauthorized personnel from
carrying out physical contacts such as damaging hardware, unauthorized connection of
removable device (such as USB ash disk, serial port), etc.
2. Change Passwords Regularly
We suggest that you change passwords regularly to reduce the risk of being guessed or cracked.
3. Set and Update Passwords Reset Information Timely
The device supports password reset function. Please set up related information for password
reset in time, including the end user’s mailbox and password protection questions. If the
information changes, please modify it in time. When setting password protection questions, it is
suggested not to use those that can be easily guessed.
4. Enable Account Lock
The account lock feature is enabled by default, and we recommend you to keep it on to
guarantee the account security. If an attacker attempts to log in with the wrong password
several times, the corresponding account and the source IP address will be locked.
5. Change Default HTTP and Other Service Ports
We suggest you to change default HTTP and other service ports into any set of numbers
between 1024–65535, reducing the risk of outsiders being able to guess which ports you are
using.
6. Enable HTTPS
We suggest you to enable HTTPS, so that you visit Web service through a secure communication
channel.
User's Manual
386
7. MAC Address Binding
We recommend you to bind the IP and MAC address of the gateway to the device, thus reducing
the risk of ARP spoong.
8. Assign Accounts and Privileges Reasonably
According to business and management requirements, reasonably add users and assign a
minimum set of permissions to them.
9. Disable Unnecessary Services and Choose Secure Modes
If not needed, it is recommended to turn o some services such as SNMP, SMTP, UPnP, etc., to
reduce risks.
If necessary, it is highly recommended that you use safe modes, including but not limited to the
following services:
●
SNMP: Choose SNMP v3, and set up strong encryption passwords and authentication
passwords.
●
SMTP: Choose TLS to access mailbox server.
●
FTP: Choose SFTP, and set up strong passwords.
●
AP hotspot: Choose WPA2-PSK encryption mode, and set up strong passwords.
10.Audio and Video Encrypted Transmission
If your audio and video data contents are very important or sensitive, we recommend that you
use encrypted transmission function, to reduce the risk of audio and video data being stolen
during transmission.
Reminder: encrypted transmission will cause some loss in transmission eciency.
11.Secure Auditing
●
Check online users: we suggest that you check online users regularly to see if the device is
logged in without authorization.
●
Check device log: By viewing the logs, you can know the IP addresses that were used to log
in to your devices and their key operations.
12.Network Log
Due to the limited storage capacity of the device, the stored log is limited. If you need to save
the log for a long time, it is recommended that you enable the network log function to ensure
that the critical logs are synchronized to the network log server for tracing.
13.Construct a Safe Network Environment
In order to better ensure the safety of device and reduce potential cyber risks, we recommend:
●
Disable the port mapping function of the router to avoid direct access to the intranet devices
from external network.
●
The network should be partitioned and isolated according to the actual network needs. If
there are no communication requirements between two sub networks, it is suggested to use
VLAN, network GAP and other technologies to partition the network, so as to achieve the
network isolation eect.
●
Establish the 802.1x access authentication system to reduce the risk of unauthorized access
to private networks.
●
Enable IP/MAC address ltering function to limit the range of hosts allowed to access the
device.
More information
Please visit Dahua ocial website security emergency response center for security announcements
and the latest security recommendations.
User's Manual
387
